CN110383163A - Electrochromic element and electrochromic device including electrochromic element - Google Patents

Abstract

In the electrochromic device according to the embodiment of the present application, when the first voltage is applied to the electrochromic device in a state where the electrochromic element has the first state, the electrochromic device becomes the second state, and when the first voltage is applied in a state where the electrochromic element has the fourth state, the electrochromic element becomes the third state.

Description

Electrochromic element and electrochromic device including electrochromic element

technical field

The present application relates to electrochromic elements and electrochromic devices including electrochromic elements, and more particularly, to electrochromic elements whose optical states change and electrochromic devices for changing the optical states of electrochromic elements .

Background technique

Electrochromism is a phenomenon that changes color based on oxidation-reduction (redox) action caused by applied electric power. Materials that can be electrochromic can be defined as electrochromic materials. An electrochromic material has the property of not displaying a color when no power is applied to it from the outside and then displaying a color when power is applied to it, or conversely, displaying a color when no power is applied to it from the outside and then when power is applied to it Color properties are not displayed.

Electrochromic devices containing electrochromic materials have been used for various purposes. Electrochromic devices have been used to adjust the transmittance or reflectivity of architectural glazing or vehicle glass. In particular, electrochromic devices have been used in rear view mirrors used in vehicles to prevent strong light behind the vehicle reflected by the rear view mirror of the vehicle from interfering with the driver's field of vision day and night.

In the case of electrochromic devices, since discoloration occurs due to electric power, there is a technical problem that the applied voltage has to be appropriately controlled to achieve a desired degree of discoloration.

Also, since power is required in the discoloration process and the maintenance process of the electrochromic device, there is a problem that the power consumption increases as the area increases.

Also, when the driving module for power supply is arranged in the electrochromic device, the driving module is not effectively arranged in the electrochromic device, and there is a problem that the inside of the electrochromic device becomes complicated.

Furthermore, since the electrochromic element has a slow electrochromic speed and low uniformity of electrochromic, there is a problem that the performance of the application including the electrochromic element is deteriorated.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

【technical problem】

One aspect of the present application is to provide an electrochromic device capable of achieving a desired level of discoloration.

Another aspect of the present application is to provide an electrochromic device with reduced power consumption.

Another aspect of the present application is to provide an electrochromic device capable of reducing discoloration changes in each area.

Another aspect of the present application is to provide an electrochromic device including an electrochromic element having a predetermined structure that enables one side to receive power for electrochromic.

Another aspect of the present application is to provide an electrochromic device that includes a drive module that can be operatively arranged in an electrochromic element.

Another aspect of the present application is to provide electrochromic elements with high color change rates.

Another aspect of the present application is to provide electrochromic elements with high uniformity of discoloration.

Another aspect of the present application is to provide an electrochromic element capable of rapid decolorization when power is turned off.

Aspects of the present application are not limited to the above-mentioned aspects, and other unmentioned aspects should be clearly understood by those of ordinary skill in the art to which the present application pertains from the present specification and the accompanying drawings.

【Technical solutions】

According to one aspect of the present application, there may be provided an electrochromic device comprising: an electrochromic element including a first electrode, a second electrode, an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode, and an ion storage layer disposed between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode; and a control unit for controlling the state of the electrochromic element by applying power to the electrochromic element to move at least one ion in the electrochromic element changing to at least one of a first state having a first transmittance, a second state having a second transmittance, a third state having a third transmittance, or a fourth state having a fourth transmittance, wherein the second transmittance The transmittance has a value greater than that of the first transmittance, the third transmittance has a value greater than that of the second transmittance, and the fourth transmittance has a value greater than that of the third transmittance. When a first voltage is applied to the electrochromic element in a state where the electrochromic element has a first state, the electrochromic element becomes a second state, and when the first voltage is applied in a state where the electrochromic element has a fourth state Upon reaching the electrochromic element, the electrochromic element becomes the third state.

According to another aspect of the present application, an electrochromic device can be provided, comprising: an electrochromic element including a first electrode, a second electrode, an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode, and an ion storage layer disposed between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode; and a control unit for controlling the movement of at least one ion of the electrochromic element by applying electric power to the electrochromic element The state changes to at least one of a first state having a first transmittance, a second state having a second transmittance, or a third state having a third transmittance, wherein the second transmittance has a higher transmittance than the first transmittance The value of the third transmittance is greater than the value of the second transmittance, wherein the control unit controls the electrochromic element by applying the first voltage to the electrochromic element in a state where the electrochromic element has the first state. The state of the electrochromic element is changed to the second state, and the control unit changes the state of the electrochromic element to the second state by applying a second voltage to the electrochromic element in a state where the electrochromic element has the third state state, and the first voltage and the second voltage are different from each other.

According to another aspect of the present application, there can be provided an electrochromic element comprising: a first electrode, a second electrode, an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode, and an electrochromic element disposed in the electrochromic layer. an ion storage layer between the layer and the second electrode; and a control unit that applies power to the electrochromic element to color or decolorize the electrochromic element by moving at least one ion in the electrochromic element; When the electrochromic element is in a decolorized state by applying a first voltage, applying a second voltage causes the electrochromic element to color, wherein a third voltage that does not change the previous state of the electrochromic exists between the first voltage and the second voltage.

【Advantage】

According to the present application, it is possible to provide an electrochromic device that achieves a desired level of discoloration by applying different applied voltages in accordance with the initial state.

According to the present application, it is possible to provide an electrochromic device capable of reducing a change in discoloration of each region by applying a driving voltage for a period longer than a threshold period.

According to the present application, an electrochromic device capable of reducing power consumption by controlling an application period of a driving voltage based on a threshold period can be provided.

According to the present application, it is possible to provide an electrochromic device capable of reducing power consumption by controlling the application period of the sustain voltage based on the threshold period.

According to the present application, it is possible to provide an electrochromic device including an electrochromic element having a predetermined structure such that one side can receive power for electrochromism.

According to the present application, it is possible to provide an electrochromic device including a drive module that can be effectively disposed in an electrochromic element.

According to the present application, an electrochromic element having a high discoloration speed can be provided.

According to the present application, an electrochromic element with high uniformity of color change can be provided.

According to the present application, it is possible to provide an electrochromic element capable of rapid decolorization when power supply is stopped.

Description of drawings

FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

2 is a diagram illustrating a control module according to an embodiment of the present application;

3 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic element according to an embodiment of the present application;

4 to 6 are diagrams illustrating state changes during coloring of an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

7 to 9 are diagrams illustrating state changes during decolorization of the electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

10 is a graph illustrating voltages applied to an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

11 is a graph illustrating the internal potential of an electrochromic device prior to applying a voltage to the electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

FIG. 12 is a graph showing a potential change in an initial stage of coloring in an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

FIG. 13 is a graph showing a potential change in a coloring completion stage in an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

14 is a graph showing the relationship between voltage applied to an electrochromic device and transmittance of the electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

15 is a graph showing a potential when a release voltage is applied after discoloration is completed in an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

16 is a graph showing a potential change in an initial stage of decolorization in an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

17 is a graph showing a potential change in a state where decolorization is completed in an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

18 is a graph showing the relationship between voltage applied to an electrochromic device and transmittance of the electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

19 is a graph showing the relationship between a voltage applied to an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application and its transmittance;

20 and 21 are graphs showing the relationship between potential and ions during coloring of an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

22 and 23 are graphs showing the relationship between potential and ions during decolorization of an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

24 is a graph showing the relationship between a voltage applied to an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application and its transmittance;

25 to 27 are graphs showing the relationship between potential and ions in a decolorization process and a coloring process of an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

28 is an equivalent circuit diagram of an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

29 to 31 are graphs showing the degree of electrochromism of electrochromic elements as a function of time according to embodiments of the present application;

FIG. 32 is a graph of a threshold period with respect to voltage according to an embodiment of the present application;

33 is a graph illustrating voltages applied to electrochromic elements from a control module in accordance with an embodiment of the present application;

34 and 35 are graphs illustrating threshold periods of voltage differences per electrochromic device according to embodiments of the present application;

36 and 37 are graphs illustrating threshold periods by duty cycle of an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

38 is a diagram illustrating elements of an electroactive device according to an embodiment of the present application;

FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a driving module according to an embodiment of the present application;

40 is a block diagram illustrating a drive unit according to an embodiment of the present application;

41 is a diagram illustrating an electroactive element according to an embodiment of the present application;

42 is an exploded perspective view illustrating an electroactive module according to an embodiment of the present application;

43 is a diagram illustrating an electroactive element in which trench structures according to embodiments of the present application are formed;

44 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic element according to an embodiment of the present application;

45 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic element in which trench structures according to embodiments of the present application are formed;

46 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic element in which trench structures according to embodiments of the present application are formed;

47 is a diagram illustrating an electrical connection member according to an embodiment of the present application;

48 is a diagram illustrating an anisotropic conductor having conductivity and insulation according to an embodiment of the present application;

49 is a diagram illustrating an electrical connection member and a drive substrate according to an embodiment of the present application;

50 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic module according to an embodiment of the present application;

51 is a side view illustrating an electrochromic element, an electrical connection member, and a drive substrate according to an embodiment of the present application;

52 is a flowchart illustrating a processing sequence of an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application;

53 is a flowchart illustrating an electrochromic method according to an embodiment of the present application;

FIG. 54 is a graph showing effective voltages formed in electrochromic elements according to embodiments of the present application;

55 is a diagram illustrating electrochromic in accordance with an embodiment of the present application;

56 and 57 are diagrams illustrating a driving substrate for forming a buffer region according to an embodiment of the present application;

58 and 59 are diagrams illustrating electrical connection members implemented to form buffer regions according to embodiments of the present application;

60 is a diagram illustrating a conductive path according to an embodiment of the present application;

61 is a diagram illustrating a trench structure with a slope of an electrochromic element according to an embodiment of the present application;

62 is a diagram illustrating an upper surface of a trench structure having a slope of an electrochromic element according to an embodiment of the present application;

63 is a diagram illustrating a side surface of a trench structure having a slope of an electrochromic element according to an embodiment of the present application;

64 and 65 are diagrams illustrating a driving substrate for forming a buffer region according to an embodiment of the present application;

66 and 67 are diagrams illustrating electrical connection members implemented to form buffer regions according to embodiments of the present application;

68 is a diagram illustrating a conductive path according to an embodiment of the present application;

Figure 69 is a diagram illustrating a drive module further comprising a dispensing member according to an embodiment of the present application;

Figure 70 is a side view illustrating a drive module further comprising a dispensing member according to an embodiment of the present application;

71 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic module further comprising a dispensing member according to an embodiment of the present application;

72 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic element according to an embodiment of the present application;

73 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic element and a driving module having a predetermined shape according to an embodiment of the present application;

74 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic element according to an embodiment of the present application;

75 is a graph showing changes in optical state of electrochromic elements according to embodiments of the present application;

76 is a diagram illustrating an internal structure of an electrochromic element according to an embodiment of the present application;

77 is a cross-sectional view of an electrochromic element showing a pillar as an example of a physical structure according to an embodiment of the present application;

78 is a cross-sectional view of an electrochromic element showing a pillar as an example of a physical structure according to an embodiment of the present application;

79 is a diagram illustrating an external shape of a column according to an embodiment of the present application;

80 is a graph illustrating the migration of electrochromic ions according to an embodiment of the present application;

81 is a comparative graph illustrating the improved electrochromic speed of an electrochromic element including a pillar and a boundary surface according to an embodiment of the present application;

82 is a comparative graph illustrating the improved electrochromic uniformity of electrochromic elements including posts and boundary surfaces in accordance with embodiments of the present application;

83 is a comparative graph illustrating the improved discoloration of electrochromic elements including posts and boundary surfaces in accordance with embodiments of the present application;

84 is a graph showing the reflectance for each wavelength of the electrochromic element according to the first embodiment during a colored state and a discolored state;

85 is a diagram illustrating an upper region and a lower region of an ion transport storage layer according to an embodiment of the present application;

FIG. 86 is a graph illustrating discoloration of an electrochromic element according to an embodiment of the present application;

Figure 87 is a diagram showing an electrochromic element actually implemented according to an embodiment of the present application;

88 is a diagram showing first and second imaginary lines and each layer of the electrochromic element provided in an electrochromic element actually realized according to an embodiment of the present application;

89 is a diagram showing an electrochromic device according to the first embodiment;

90 is a cross-sectional view showing the electrochromic element according to the first embodiment;

FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an electrochromic device according to the second embodiment;

92 is a cross-sectional view of an electrochromic element according to a second embodiment;

93 is a graph showing the light transmittance in the discolored state of the electrochromic element according to the second embodiment and the electrochromic element according to the third embodiment;

94 is a graph showing transmittance in a colored state of the electrochromic element according to the second embodiment and the electrochromic element according to the third embodiment;

Figure 95 is a diagram showing an electrochromic element with curvature;

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an electrochromic device applied to glass of a building.

specific embodiment

The embodiments described in the present specification are used to clearly describe the concept of the present embodiment to those of ordinary skill in the art to which the present embodiment belongs. Therefore, the present embodiment is not limited to the embodiments described in this specification, and the scope of the present embodiment should be construed to include modified examples belonging to the idea of the present embodiment.

Terms used in this specification are selected from currently widely used general terms in consideration of functions in this embodiment, but may vary according to intentions or practices of those of ordinary skill in the art to which this embodiment belongs, or the appearance of new technologies. On the contrary, when the applicant arbitrarily defines and uses certain terms, the meanings of the terms will be described below. Therefore, the terms used in this specification should be interpreted based on the substantial meanings that the terms have and the content throughout the specification, not just the names of the terms.

The drawings attached to this specification are for the convenience of describing the present embodiment, and the shapes shown in the drawings may be exaggerated as necessary to help understanding of the present embodiment. Therefore, the present embodiment is not limited to the drawings.

In this specification, when a detailed description of a known configuration or function related to the present embodiment is considered to obscure the gist of the present embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted as necessary.

According to one aspect of the present application, there may be provided an electrochromic device comprising: an electrochromic element including a first electrode, a second electrode, an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode, and an ion storage layer disposed between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode; and a control unit for controlling the movement of at least one ion in the electrochromic element by applying electric power to the electrochromic element The state changes to at least one of a first state having a first transmittance, a second state having a second transmittance, a third state having a third transmittance, or a fourth state having a fourth transmittance, wherein the second The transmittance has a value greater than that of the first transmittance, the third transmittance has a value greater than that of the second transmittance, and the fourth transmittance has a value greater than that of the third transmittance, and when the electrical When a first voltage is applied to the electrochromic element in a state where the electrochromic element has a first state, the electrochromic element changes to a second state, and when the first voltage is applied in a state where the electrochromic element has a fourth state When applied to the electrochromic element, the electrochromic element changes to a third state.

Here, the electrochromic layer and the ion storage layer can be discolored by the movement of ions.

Here, the electrochromic layer and the ion storage layer may have binding force with ions, and the binding force between the electrochromic layer and the ions and the binding force between the ion storage layer and the ions may be different from each other.

Here, the first threshold voltage for releasing the bond between the electrochromic layer and the ions and the second threshold voltage for releasing the bond between the ion storage layer and the ions may be different from each other.

Here, the electrochromic layer may have an internal potential, and the internal potential may be proportional to the number of ions located in the electrochromic layer.

Here, the control unit may apply a voltage higher than the sum of the internal potential and the first threshold voltage to move the ions.

Here, the control unit may apply a voltage lower than the difference between the internal potential and the first threshold voltage to move the ions.

Here, the first state, the second state, the third state or the fourth state may be determined by the number of ions contained in the electrochromic layer.

Here, the first state, the second state, the third state or the fourth state may be determined according to the ratio of ions contained in the electrochromic layer to ions contained in the ion storage layer.

Here, the binding force between the electrochromic layer and the ion storage layer and the ions may be physical binding force or chemical binding force.

Here, due to differences in physical structures of the electrochromic layer and the ion storage layer, the physical binding force between the electrochromic layer and the ion storage layer may be different from that of the ion storage layer.

Here, the ions may be hydrogen ions or lithium ions.

According to another aspect of the present application, an electrochromic device can be provided, comprising: an electrochromic element including a first electrode, a second electrode, an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode, and an ion storage layer disposed between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode; and a control unit for controlling the movement of at least one ion of the electrochromic element by applying electric power to the electrochromic element The state changes to at least one of a first state having a first transmittance, a second state having a second transmittance, or a third state having a third transmittance, wherein the second transmittance has a higher transmittance than the first transmittance The value of the third transmittance is greater than the value of the second transmittance, wherein the control unit controls the electrochromic element by applying the first voltage to the electrochromic element in a state where the electrochromic element has the first state. The state of the electrochromic element is changed to the second state, and the control unit changes the state of the electrochromic element to the second state by applying a second voltage to the electrochromic element in a state where the electrochromic element has the third state state, and the first voltage and the second voltage are different from each other.

Here, the second voltage may be higher than the first voltage.

Here, the controller may change the state of the electrochromic element to the second state, and may selectively apply the first voltage or the second voltage based on whether the electrochromic element is in the first state or the third state.

Here, the control unit may selectively apply the first voltage or by determining whether the process for changing the electrochromic device to the second state is a coloring process or a decolorizing process based on whether the electrochromic device is in the first state or the third state. second voltage.

Here, the control unit may determine the previous state by the voltage applied to the previous state.

Here, the electrochromic device further includes: a storage unit that stores each driving voltage in the coloring process and the decolorizing process.

Here, the storage unit may store the driving voltage for each target state in the coloring process and the driving voltage for each target level in the decolorizing process.

According to another aspect of the present application, there can be provided an electrochromic element comprising: a first electrode, a second electrode, an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode, and an electrochromic element disposed in the electrochromic layer. an ion storage layer between the layer and the second electrode; and a control unit that applies power to the electrochromic element to color or decolorize the electrochromic element by moving at least one ion in the electrochromic element; When the electrochromic element is in a decolorized state by applying a first voltage, applying a second voltage causes the electrochromic element to color, wherein a third voltage that does not change the previous state of the electrochromic exists between the first voltage and the second voltage.

Here, when the third voltage is applied, ions present in the electrochromic layer and the ion storage layer may not move.

According to another aspect of the present application, an electrochromic device can be provided, comprising: an electrochromic element, comprising: a first electrode, a second electrode, an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode , and an ion storage layer disposed between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode; and a control unit that applies power to the electrochromic element to color the electrochromic element by moving at least one ion in the electrochromic element or decolorization; wherein, when the electrochromic element is in a decolorized state by applying a first voltage, a second voltage is applied to color the electrochromic element, and the second voltage is larger than the first voltage by a non-variable voltage portion.

Here, the electrochromic layer and the ion storage layer may have binding force with ions, and the binding force between the electrochromic layer and the ions and the binding force between the ion storage layer and the ions may be different from each other.

Here, the non-variable voltage portion may correspond to the sum of the first threshold voltage and the second threshold voltage, and the first threshold voltage may be a voltage for releasing the bond between the electrochromic layer and the ions, and the second threshold voltage may is the voltage used to release the bond between the ion storage layer and the ions.

According to another aspect of the present application, an electrochromic device can be provided, comprising: an electrochromic element including a first electrode, a second electrode, an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode, and an ion storage layer disposed between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode; and a control unit for controlling the movement of at least one ion of the electrochromic element by applying electric power to the electrochromic element a state change to at least one of a first state having a first transmittance or a second state having a second transmittance greater than the first transmittance, wherein the electrochromic element includes a first region and a second region , where the voltage is applied for a threshold period such that the transmittance of the first region corresponds to the transmittance of the second region, the threshold period is the first when the first voltage is applied to the electrochromic element to change the state to the first state The threshold period is the second threshold period when the second voltage is applied to the electrochromic element to change the state to the second state.

Here, the initial state of the electrochromic element discolored to the first state may be the same as the initial state of the electrochromic element discolored to the second state, and the initial state may be the third state.

Here, the first threshold period may be changed by the third state.

Here, when the difference between the transmittance of the third state and the transmittance of the first state is decreased, the first threshold period may be decreased.

Here, the threshold period may be changed by temperature.

Here, the electrochromic element may comprise a contact area electrically connected to the control unit, and the transmittance of the electrochromic element may be changed from an area adjacent to the contact area.

Here, when a voltage may be applied to the electrochromic element for a threshold period, the transmittance of the first region and the transmittance of the second region may have a difference.

Here, the difference between the transmittance of the first region and the transmittance of the second region may be proportional to the sheet resistance of one of the first electrode and the second electrode.

Here, the second voltage may be greater than the first voltage.

Here, the second threshold period may be longer than the first threshold period.

According to another aspect of the present application, an electrochromic device can be provided, comprising: an electrochromic element including a first electrode, a second electrode, an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode, and an ion storage layer disposed between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode; and a control unit for controlling the movement of at least one ion of the electrochromic element by applying electric power to the electrochromic element a state change to at least one of a first state having a first transmittance or a second state having a second transmittance greater than the first transmittance, wherein the electrochromic element includes a first region and a second region , wherein the control unit applies a voltage to the electrochromic element for an application period of at least the threshold period, so that the transmittance of the first region corresponds to the transmittance of the second region, wherein when the electrochromic element changes to the first state, the control The cell application is continued for the first application period, wherein when the electrochromic element=changes to the second state, the cell application is controlled for the second application period.

Here, the second application period may be different from the first application period.

Here, the second application period may be longer than the first application period.

Here, the first application period may be the same as the second application period.

Here, the first application period and the second application period may be set according to the area of the electrochromic element.

Here, when the second state has the maximum transmittance, when the electrochromic element can be changed to all states, the control unit may apply the voltage for the second application period.

Here, the control unit may determine the application period based on the current state of the electrochromic element.

Here, the control unit may determine the current state of the electrochromic element based on the voltage applied when the electrochromic element becomes the current state.

Here, an electrochromic device may be provided, further comprising: a storage unit for storing a voltage applied when the electrochromic element becomes the current state.

According to another aspect of the present application, an electrochromic device can be provided, comprising: an electrochromic element including a first electrode, a second electrode, an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode, and an ion storage layer disposed between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode; and a control unit for controlling the movement of at least one ion of the electrochromic element by applying electric power to the electrochromic element The state is changed to at least one of a first state having a first transmittance, a second state having a second transmittance, or a third state having a third transmittance, wherein the second transmittance has a value greater than the first transmittance a greater value, the third transmittance has a greater value than the value of the second transmittance, wherein the electrochromic element includes a first region and a second region, wherein the voltage is applied for a threshold period such that the transmittance of the first region The transmittance corresponding to the second region, wherein the threshold period when the first voltage is applied to the electrochromic element for changing the state of the electrochromic element from the first state to the third state is the first threshold period, wherein when The threshold period when the first voltage is applied to the electrochromic element for changing the state of the electrochromic element from the second state to the third state is the second threshold period, wherein the first threshold period is different from the second threshold period.

Here, the second threshold period may be longer than the first threshold period.

Here, the first threshold period may be determined by the difference of the first transmittance and the third transmittance, and the second threshold period may be determined by the difference of the first transmittance and the second transmittance,

Here, the first threshold period may be determined by the difference between the first voltage and the voltage applied when the electrochromic element changes to the first state, and the second threshold period may be determined by the first voltage and the electrochromic element changing to the second state The difference between the applied voltages is determined.

According to another aspect of the present application, an electrochromic device can be provided, comprising: an electrochromic element including a first electrode, a second electrode, an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode, and an ion storage layer disposed between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode; and a control unit for controlling the movement of at least one ion of the electrochromic element by applying electric power to the electrochromic element The state is changed to at least one of a first state having a first transmittance, a second state having a second transmittance, or a third state having a third transmittance, wherein the second transmittance has a value greater than the first transmittance a greater value, the third transmittance has a greater value than the value of the second transmittance, wherein the electrochromic element includes a first region and a second region, wherein the control unit applies a voltage to the electrochromic element for at least a threshold value the application period of the period such that the transmittance of the first region corresponds to the transmittance of the second region, wherein the control unit applies a voltage for the first application period such that the electrochromic element changes from the first state to the third state, wherein the control unit The voltage is applied for the second application period, causing the electrochromic element to change from the second state to the third state.

Here, the second application period may be shorter than the first application period.

Here, the voltage value applied during the first application period may be the same as the voltage value applied during the second application period.

Here, when the first transmittance is the minimum transmittance and the third transmittance is the maximum transmittance, all the voltages applied from the control unit may be applied during the first application period.

Here, the control unit may determine the first application period based on the difference between the first transmittance and the second transmittance, and the control unit may determine the second application period based on the difference between the first transmittance and the third transmittance.

According to another aspect of the present application, an electrochromic device can be provided, comprising: an electrochromic element including a first electrode, a second electrode, an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode, and an ion storage layer disposed between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode; and a control unit for controlling the movement of at least one ion of the electrochromic element by applying electric power to the electrochromic element a state change to at least one of a first state having a first transmittance, or a second state having a second transmittance greater than the first transmittance, wherein the electrochromic element includes a first region and a second region , wherein the voltage is applied for the threshold period, so that the transmittance of the first region corresponds to the transmittance of the second region, wherein the control unit applies a sustaining voltage in the sustaining phase for maintaining the state of the electrochromic element, wherein for maintaining the electrochromic element The threshold period of the first state of the element is the first threshold period, wherein the threshold period for maintaining the second state of the electrochromic element is the second threshold period.

Here, the second threshold period may be longer than the first threshold period.

Here, the sustaining phase may include an application period in which the sustaining voltage is applied and a non-application period in which the sustaining voltage is not applied, and when the non-applying period is the first non-applying period in the sustaining phase, for maintaining the first state of the electrochromic element The threshold period may be a third threshold period, and the threshold period for maintaining the first state of the electrochromic element may be a fourth threshold period when the non-application period is the second non-application period in the sustaining phase.

Here, when the first non-application period is longer than the second non-application period, the third threshold period may be longer than the fourth threshold period.

Here, the sustain voltage for maintaining the first state may be the first sustain voltage, and the sustain voltage for maintaining the second state may be the second sustain voltage.

Here, the first sustain voltage may be smaller than the second sustain voltage.

Here, the initial state changed to the first state may be the third state in the discoloration phase of the electrochromic element, and the initial state changed to the second state may be the third state in the discoloration phase of the electrochromic element.

Here, the first threshold period may be changed based on the third state.

Here, when the difference between the transmittance of the third state and the transmittance of the first state is decreased, the first threshold period may be decreased.

Here, the threshold period may be changed based on the temperature.

Here, the threshold period during which the first voltage is applied to the electrochromic element in the discoloration stage for changing the state of the electrochromic element to the first state may be the fifth threshold period, and the second voltage is applied to the electrochromic element in the discoloration stage The threshold period for the electrochromic element to change the state of the electrochromic element to the second state may be a sixth threshold period, and the sixth threshold period may be shorter than the fifth threshold period.

According to another aspect of the present application, an electrochromic device can be provided, comprising: an electrochromic element including a first electrode, a second electrode, an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode, and an ion storage layer disposed between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode; and a control unit for controlling the movement of at least one ion of the electrochromic element by applying electric power to the electrochromic element a state change to at least one of a first state having a first transmittance, or a second state having a second transmittance greater than the first transmittance, wherein the electrochromic element includes a first region and a second region , wherein the control unit applies the sustaining voltage for an application period of at least the threshold period, so that the transmittance of the first region corresponds to the transmittance of the second region, in order to maintain the state of the electrochromic element in the sustaining phase, wherein the control unit is in the first A first sustain voltage is applied during the application period for maintaining the first state of the electrochromic element, wherein the control unit applies a second sustain voltage during the second application period for maintaining the second state of the electrochromic element.

Here, the second application period may be longer than the first application period.

Here, the sustain phase may further include a non-application period in which the sustain voltage is not applied, and when the non-application period is the first non-application period in the sustain phase, the control unit may apply the first sustain voltage for the sustain during the third application period the first state of the electrochromic element, and when the non-applying period is the second non-applying period of the sustaining phase, the control unit may apply a first sustaining voltage for maintaining the first sustaining voltage of the electrochromic element during the fourth applying period state.

Here, when the first non-application period is longer than the second non-application period, the third application period may be longer than the fourth application period.

Here, after changing the electrochromic element to all states in which the electrochromic element can be changed under the condition that the second transmittance is the maximum transmittance, the control unit may apply a sustain voltage for maintaining the changed state during the second application period state.

Here, the control unit may apply a first color changing voltage to change the electrochromic element to the first state during the color changing stage, and the control unit may apply a second color changing voltage to change the electrochromic element to the second state during the color changing stage.

Here, the first discoloration voltage may be the same as the first sustain voltage.

Here, the control unit may apply the first color changing voltage to change the electrochromic element to the first state during the first color changing voltage application period of the color changing stage, and the control unit may apply the first color changing voltage during the second color changing voltage applying period of the color changing stage Two color-changing voltages to change the electrochromic element to the second state, and the first color-changing voltage application period may be longer than or equal to the first application period.

Here, the control unit may determine the application period of the color change based on the current state of the electrochromic element.

According to another aspect of the present application, there can be provided a method of driving an electrochromic element, the electrochromic element comprising a first electrode, a second electrode, an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode, and an ion storage layer disposed between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode, the method comprising: applying a first voltage to the electrochromic element such that the electrochromic element is in a discoloration stage of a first state having a first transmittance and applying a first voltage to the electrochromic element during an application period for a sustain phase for maintaining the first state, wherein the application period is longer than or equal to a threshold period that allows the transmittance of the first region to correspond to the first Transmittance of the second region.

Here, the sustaining phase may include an application phase and a non-application phase, and the application phase may apply the first voltage during the application period, and the non-application phase may not apply the first voltage during the non-application period, and may be based on the length of the non-application period to determine the application period.

Here, the threshold period may be proportional to the non-application period.

Here, the threshold period may be proportional to the value of the first voltage.

Here, the application period may be determined based on the value of the first voltage.

Here, the first voltage may have a first rising period in the discoloration phase, and the first voltage may have a second rising period in the sustaining phase, and the first rising period may be shorter than the second rising period.

Here, the first voltage may have a first rising angle during the discoloration phase, and the first voltage may have a second rising angle during the sustaining phase, and the first rising angle may be smaller than the second rising angle.

Here, the first rise angle may be determined based on the value of the first voltage.

According to another aspect of the present application, there can be provided an electrochromic device, comprising: an electrochromic element, comprising: a first electrode including a contact area; a second electrode including a pad area; and an intermediate layer disposed on a between an electrode and the first electrode; a base, in contact with the electrochromic element; a conductor, contained in the base, wherein the conductor includes a first conductor and a second conductor, and a drive substrate disposed on the upper surface of the base; wherein, The driving substrate includes a driving unit, the driving unit generates driving power for changing the optical state of the electrochromic device, and the driving power includes a first driving power and a second driving power; wherein, the intermediate layer includes an electrochromic layer, an electrolyte layer and an ion storage layer wherein a conductor contained in the base is in contact with the electrochromic element, a first conductor contacts the pad region, and a second conductor contacts the contact region and wherein the first conductor transfers the first drive power to the pad area, and the second conductor delivers the second drive power to the contact area.

According to another aspect of the present application, there can be provided an electrochromic device, comprising: an electrochromic device, comprising: a first electrode, a second electrode, and an intermediate layer arranged between the first electrode and the second electrode; arranged a base in contact with the electrochromic device; and a conductor included in the base, the conductors comprising a first conductor and a second conductor, wherein the conductor included in the base contacts the electrochromic device and the first conductor contacts the first electrode and the second conductor in contact with the second electrode, wherein driving power including the first driving power and the second driving power is applied to the first electrode and the second electrode through the conductor, and the first electrode receives the first driving power and the second electrode through the first conductor The two electrodes receive the second driving power through the second conductor.

Here, the intermediate layer may include an electrochromic layer, an electrolyte layer, and an ion storage layer, and the electrochromic element is discolored by a redox reaction.

Here, a trench structure exposing a region of the second electrode of the electrochromic element may be formed at a region adjacent to the side surface of the electrochromic element, and the trench structure may include a contact region and a pad region, and the contact region may is an exposed area of the first electrode included in the trench structure, and the pad area may be an exposed area of the second electrode.

Here, the first conductor may contact the pad area and the second conductor contact the contact area.

Here, the trench structure may include a raised area disposed between a recessed area and an adjacent recessed area, and the recessed area may be where the first electrode and the intermediate layer may be removed such that the pad area is exposed in the direction of the first electrode area.

Here, the base may be inserted into the recessed area, and the inserted base may be in contact with the pad portion.

Here, the driving substrate may be arranged in contact with the upper surface of the base.

Here, the driving substrate may include a connection member for outputting driving power, and the connection member may be in contact with the upper surface of the base.

Here, the connection member may include a first connection member for outputting the first driving power and a second connection member for outputting the second driving power, and the first connection member may transmit the first driving power to the first conductor, and The second connection member may transmit the second driving power to the second conductor.

Here, the first driving power can be transferred to the pad region through the first conductor, and the second driving power can be transferred to the contact region through the second conductor.

Here, an effective voltage may be formed in the electrochromic element based on the first driving power and the second driving power, and the electrochromic element may be discolored by the effective voltage.

Here, the base portion may include a plurality of first conductors and a plurality of second conductors, at least one of the first conductors may be in contact with the first connection member, and at least one of the second conductors may be in contact with the second connection member.

Here, a conductive path for transmitting driving power may be formed in the base, the conductive path includes a first conductive path and a second conductive path, and the first conductive path may be formed of at least one of the first conductors, and the second conductive path The path may be formed by at least one of the second conductors.

Here, the first driving power is transferred to the pad region through the first conductive path, and the second driving power is transferred to the contact region through the second conductive path.

Here, the base may have insulating properties, and a region between the first conductive path and the second conductive path may be insulated by the base.

Here, there may be at least two conductors that are not in contact with each other between the first conductive path and the second conductive path.

Here, the buffer region may be formed in a region between the contact region of the electrochromic element and the pad region, and the buffer region may be a region where driving power is not transmitted.

Here, the conductor may further include a third conductor in contact with the buffer region, and the third conductor may be electrically isolated.

Here, the area of the base corresponding to the buffer area may be electrically isolated, and the third conductor may be included in the area of the base corresponding to the buffer area.

Here, the connection members formed at the regions corresponding to the buffer regions may be electrically isolated.

Here, the driving unit may not transmit the driving power to the connection member positioned corresponding to the buffer area.

Here, the trench structure may include a connection surface connecting the pad area and the contact area, and the connection surface may be angled to the first electrode and the second electrode.

Here, the connection surface may be exposed upwards.

Here, an electrochromic device may be provided, further comprising: a distribution member that electrically connects the drive substrate and the conductor included in the base.

Here, the distribution member may include a first distribution member connectable to the first connection member to transmit the first driving power to the first conductor, and a second distribution member connectable to the second connection member The second drive power is delivered to the second conductor.

According to another aspect of the present application, there can be provided an electrical connection member including: an anisotropic conductor arranged in a conductor, including a first region, a second region, and a third region; a base; and a conductor included in the base ; wherein the third area is located between the first area and the second area, wherein the conductors comprise a first conductor contacting only the first area, a second conductor contacting only the second area, and a third conductor contacting only the third area, wherein when the first drive power is applied to the first conductor and the second drive power is applied to the second conductor, the first region has a first potential based on the first drive power, and the second region has a first potential based on the second drive power two potentials, and the third region is electrically isolated.

According to another aspect of the present application, an electrochromic device can be provided, comprising: a first electrode including a first recessed portion; a second electrode facing the first electrode; a second electrode located at the first electrode and including the second recessed portion an electrochromic layer between the two electrodes, wherein the optical properties of the electrochromic layer are changed by the movement of at least one ion; and an ion storage layer between the first electrode and the electrochromic layer including the third recessed portion; wherein, the optical properties of the ion storage layer are changed by the movement of at least one ion; and the electrolyte layer is located between the electrochromic layer and the ion storage layer including the fourth recessed portion; wherein the second electrode comprises the first recessed portion, The upwardly exposed protruding surfaces of the second recessed portion, the third recessed portion, and the fourth recessed portion, wherein the protruding surface is angled to the first electrode, wherein the protruding surface is in contact with the conductor.

According to another aspect of the present application, there can be provided an electrochromic element having an optical state changed by applied electric power, the electrochromic element comprising: a first electrode; a second electrode arranged to face the first electrode an electrochromic layer disposed between the first electrode and the second electrode; and an ion transport storage layer disposed in contact with the lower surface of the electrochromic layer and the upper surface of the second electrode; wherein, when the first electrode is in contact The electrochromic element has a first optical state according to the electrochromic layer receiving at least one electron from the first electrode and at least one ion from the ion transport storage layer when a first potential difference is formed between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode. Upon forming a second potential difference between the first electrode and the second electrode, the electrochromic element has a second optical state in accordance with the ion transport storage layer receiving at least one electron from the second electrode and at least one ion from the electrochromic layer, wherein , the physical structure of the ion transport storage layer is continuous, wherein the physical structure of the ion transport storage layer and the physical structure of the electrochromic layer are discontinuous with respect to the boundary.

Here, the ion transport storage layer may be divided into a first ion region and a second ion region by a first imaginary line, the first ion region may be adjacent to the electrochromic layer, and the first imaginary line may be provided at the ion transport storage layer , and the first ion region and the second ion region may be continuous with respect to the first imaginary line.

Here, the physical structure of the electrochromic layer and the physical structure of the first ion region can be visually distinguished by the boundary.

Here, an electrochromic element may be provided, which further includes: a column having a shape extending in the direction of the first electrode or the direction of the second electrode, wherein the column includes a color-changing column formed in the electrochromic layer and an ion transporting column. Ion pillars formed in the storage layer.

Here, the color-changing column and the ion column can be in contact with the boundary.

Here, the color changing column may include a color changing left side and a color changing right side, and the color changing right side may be separated from the color changing left side in a direction parallel to the lower surface of the first electrode, the ion column may include an ion left side and an ion right side, and The ion right side is separated from the ion left side in a direction parallel to the upper surface of the second electrode.

Here, the left side of the ion may have a first angle with the boundary, and the right side of the ion may have a second angle with the boundary, and the first angle and the second angle may be different.

Here, the ion column may include a first region and a second region, the distance between the ion left side and the ion right side may be the first length in the first region, and the distance between the ion left side and the ion right side in the first region There may be a second length in the two regions, and the first length and the second length are different.

Here, a first imaginary line extending in a direction parallel to the lower surface of the first electrode may exist in the electrochromic layer, and there may be a first imaginary line extending in a direction parallel to the upper surface of the second electrode in the ion transport storage layer The second imaginary line, and the color changing column may be continuous with respect to the first imaginary line, and the ion column may be continuous with respect to the second imaginary line.

Here, the discoloration left and the discoloration right may be continuous with respect to the first imaginary line, and the ion left and the ion right may be continuous with respect to the second imaginary line.

Here, the color changing left side and the ionic right side can be in contact with each other, and the color changing column and the ionic column can be visually distinguished by the boundary.

Here, the ion transport storage layer may include an upper region in contact with the electrochromic layer and a lower region in contact with the second electrode, and ions of the electrochromic layer and ions of the ion transport storage layer may move through the upper region, and the upper region The movement of electrons between the electrochromic layer and the ion transport storage layer can be blocked.

Here, when a first potential difference is formed between the first electrode and the second electrode, the upper region may have a first optical state, and when a second potential difference is formed between the first electrode and the second electrode, the upper region may has a first optical state.

According to another aspect of the present application, an electrochromic element can be provided, comprising: a first electrode; a second electrode arranged to face the first electrode; an electrochromic layer arranged between the first electrode and the second electrode and an ion transport storage layer arranged in contact with the lower surface of the electrochromic layer and the upper surface of the second electrode; wherein the first imaginary line is disposed in the electrochromic layer and extends parallel to the lower surface of the first electrode, and A second imaginary line is provided in the ion transport storage layer and extends parallel to the upper surface of the second electrode, wherein the area of the electrochromic layer is divided by the first imaginary line into a first color changing area and a second color changing area in contact with the ion transport storage layer region, and the region of the ion transport storage layer is divided by a second imaginary line into a first ion region and a second ion region in contact with the electrochromic layer, wherein the physical structure of the first color changing region and the physical structure of the second color changing region are opposite The first imaginary line is continuous, and the physical structure area of the first ionic region and the physical structure of the second ionic region are continuous with respect to the second imaginary line, wherein the physical structure of the second color changing region of the electrochromic layer and The physical structures of the second ion regions of the ion transport storage layer are in contact with each other, and the physical structures of the second ion regions of the electrochromic layer and the physical structures of the second ion regions of the ion transport storage layer are discontinuous with respect to the boundary.

An electrochromic device according to an embodiment includes: a reflective layer; a first electrochromic layer on the reflective layer; an ion transport layer on the first electrochromic layer; a second electrochromic layer on the ion transport layer a transparent electrode layer on the second electrochromic layer; and a drive circuit for applying a voltage to the reflective layer and the transparent electrode layer, wherein the distance between the first electrochromic layer and the drive circuit is shorter than that of the second electrochromic layer The distance between the color-changing layer and the driving circuit, wherein when the first electrochromic layer is colored by the movement of ions, the second electrochromic layer is also colored.

The first electrochromic layer may include iridium atoms, and the second electrochromic layer may include tungsten atoms.

Wherein the electrochromic device further comprises a contact hole formed through the reflective layer, the first electrochromic layer, the ion transport layer and the second electrochromic layer, and the area removed by the first electrochromic layer through the contact hole may be larger than the first electrochromic layer Two areas where the electrochromic layer is removed through the contact holes.

Wherein the electrochromic device further comprises a cutting area formed by cutting the reflective layer, the first electrochromic layer, the ion transport layer, the second electrochromic layer, the transparent electrode and the substrate, and the cutting area of the first electrochromic layer may be larger than The cut area of the second electrochromic layer.

The first electrochromic layer may include tungsten atoms, and the second electrochromic layer may include iridium atoms.

An electrochromic device according to an embodiment includes: a substrate having a curvature; a first transparent electrode on the substrate; a first electrochromic layer on the first transparent electrode; an ion transport layer on the first electrochromic layer a second electrochromic layer on the ion transport layer; and a second transparent electrode on the second electrochromic layer, wherein the first electrochromic layer has a first radius of curvature and the second electrochromic layer has a first Two radii of curvature, and the first and second radii of curvature are different from each other.

Wherein, the first radius of curvature may be greater than the second radius of curvature.

The first electrochromic layer may include tungsten atoms, and the second electrochromic layer may include iridium atoms.

The first electrochromic layer may include iridium atoms, and the second electrochromic layer may include tungsten atoms.

Wherein, the electrochromic device further comprises a contact hole formed through the second transparent electrode, the second electrochromic layer, the ion transport layer and the first electrochromic layer, and the first electrochromic layer is removed through the contact hole The area may be smaller than the area removed by the second electrochromic layer through the contact hole.

Wherein the electrochromic further comprises a cutting area formed by cutting the first transparent electrode, the first electrochromic layer, the ion transport layer, the second electrochromic layer and the second transparent electrode, the cutting of the first electrochromic layer The area may be smaller than the cut area of the electrochromic layer.

An electrochromic device according to an embodiment includes: a substrate; a first transparent electrode on the substrate; a first electrochromic layer on the first transparent electrode; an ion transport layer arranged on the first electrochromic layer; a second electrochromic layer on the ion transport layer; a second transparent electrode on the second electrochromic layer; a glass substrate in contact with outdoor air; and a fluid between the glass substrate and the second transparent electrode, wherein the Compared to the first electrochromic layer, the second electrochromic layer is adjacent to the fluid.

The first electrochromic layer may include tungsten atoms, and the second electrochromic layer may include iridium atoms.

The first electrochromic layer may include iridium atoms, and the second electrochromic layer may include tungsten atoms.

In this specification, the "optical state" of a configuration may be defined as meaning encompassing the light-related properties of the configuration. The optical state may include refractive index, transmittance (transmittance), color efficiency, optical density, color index, discoloration/decolorization state, and the like.

In the present specification, "change in optical state" may refer to the above-mentioned change in optical state. However, hereinafter, the change in the optical state refers to the change in the discoloration/decolorization state unless otherwise mentioned.

In this specification, "distinguishing" may refer to visual distinguishing. When distinguishing one configuration from another, the configuration can be visually distinguished from other configurations. In other words, when differentiating the configuration from other configurations, the configuration and other configurations can be regarded as different configurations.

Hereinafter, an electrochromic device according to an embodiment will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings.

<First embodiment group>

1. Electrochromic equipment

FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 1 , an electrochromic device 10001 according to one embodiment includes a control module 10100 and an electrochromic element 10200 .

The electrochromic device 10001 can receive power from an external power source 10002 .

An external power source 10002 may supply power to the electrochromic device 10001 . An external power source 10002 may supply power to the control module 10100 . External power supply 10002 may provide voltage and/or current to control module 10100 . The external power supply 10002 may supply the control module 10100 with a DC voltage or an AC voltage.

The control module 10100 can control the electrochromic element 10200 . The control module 10100 may generate driving power based on the power received from the external power source 10002 and supply the generated driving power to the electrochromic element 10200 . The control module 10100 can drive the electrochromic element 10200 . The control module 10100 can change the state of the electrochromic element 10200 by driving power. The control module 10100 can change the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 . The control module 10100 can change the reflectivity of the electrochromic element 10200 . The control module 10100 can cause the electrochromic element 10200 to change color. The control module 10100 can decolor or color the electrochromic element 10200 . The control module 10100 can control the electrochromic element 10200 to be decolorized or colored.

The state of the electrochromic element 10200 can be changed by the control module 10100 . The state of the electrochromic element 10200 can be changed by driving a voltage. The electrochromic element 10200 can be discolored by a driving voltage. The electrochromic element 10200 can be decolorized or colored by a driving voltage. The transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 can be changed by driving a voltage. The reflectivity of the electrochromic element 10200 can be changed by driving a voltage.

Electrochromic element 10200 may be a mirror. Electrochromic element 10200 may be a window. When the electrochromic element 10200 is a mirror, its reflectivity can be changed by a driving voltage. When the electrochromic element 10200 is a window, its transmittance can be changed by the driving voltage.

When the electrochromic element 10200 is a mirror, its reflectivity can decrease when the electrochromic element is colored, and its reflectivity can increase when the electrochromic element is discolored.

When the electrochromic element 10200 is a window, its transmittance can decrease when the electrochromic element is colored, and its transmittance can increase when the electrochromic element is discolored.

FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a control module according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 2 , the control module 10100 according to an embodiment may include a control unit 10110 , a power conversion unit 10120 , an output unit 10130 and a storage unit 10140 .

The control unit 10110 may control the power conversion unit 10120 , the output unit 10130 and the storage unit 10140 .

The control unit 10110 may generate a control signal for changing the state of the electrochromic element 10200 , output the generated control signal to the output unit 10130 , and control the voltage output by the output unit 10130 .

The control unit 10110 may operate by the voltage output from the external power source 10002 or the power conversion unit 10120 .

When the control unit 10110 is operated by the voltage output from the external power source 10002, the control unit 10110 may include a configuration capable of converting electric power. For example, when the control unit 10110 receives an AC voltage from the external power source 10002, the control unit 10110 may convert the AC voltage to a DC voltage and use the DC voltage in operation. When the control unit 10110 receives the DC voltage from the external power supply 10002, the control unit 10110 may reduce the DC voltage received from the external power supply 10002 and use the reduced DC voltage in operation.

The power conversion unit 10120 may receive power from the external power source 10002 . The power conversion unit 10120 may receive current and/or voltage. The power conversion unit 10120 may receive a DC voltage or an AC voltage.

The power conversion unit 10120 may generate internal power based on the power received from the external power source 10002 . The power conversion unit 10120 may generate internal power by converting the power received from the external power source 10002 . The power conversion unit 10120 may provide internal power to each configuration in the control module 10100 . The power conversion unit 10120 may supply internal power to the control unit 10110 , the output unit 10130 and the storage unit 10140 . The internal power may be operating power for operating each configuration in the control module 10100 . The control unit 10110, the output unit 10130, and the storage unit 10140 may be operated by internal power. When the power conversion unit 10120 supplies the internal power to the control unit 10110 , the control unit 10110 may not receive power from the external power source 10002 . In this case, the configuration capable of converting electric power can be omitted from the control unit 10110.

The power conversion unit 10120 may change the level of power received from the external power source 10002 or change the received power to DC power. Alternatively, the power conversion unit 10120 may change the power received from the external power source 10002 to DC power, and then change the level of the received power.

When the power conversion unit 10120 receives the AC voltage from the external power source 10002, the power conversion unit 10120 may change the received AC voltage to a DC voltage, and then change the level of the DC voltage. In this case, the power conversion unit 10120 may include a regulator. The power conversion unit 10120 may include a linear regulator configured to directly adjust the received power, or may include a switching regulator configured to generate pulses based on the received power, and adjust the pulse amount to output an adjusted voltage.

When the power conversion unit 10120 receives the DC voltage from the external power source 10002, the power conversion unit 10120 may change the level of the received DC voltage.

The internal power output from the power conversion unit 10120 may include a plurality of voltage levels. The power conversion unit 10120 may generate internal power with multiple voltage levels required to operate each configuration in the control module 10100 .

The output unit 10130 may generate a driving voltage. The output unit 10130 may generate a driving voltage based on the internal power. The output unit 10130 may generate a driving voltage through the control of the control unit 10110 . The output unit 10130 may apply a driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 . The output unit 10130 may output driving voltages having different levels through the control of the control unit 10110 . That is, the output unit 10130 may change the level of the driving voltage through the control of the control unit 10110 . The electrochromic element 10200 may be discolored by the driving voltage output from the output unit 10130 . The electrochromic element 10200 may be colored or discolored by the driving voltage output from the output unit 10130 .

Coloration and decolorization of the electrochromic element 10200 can be determined by the range of driving voltages. For example, the electrochromic element 10200 can be colored when the drive voltage is at a certain level or higher, and the electrochromic element 10200 can be discolored when the drive voltage is at a level less than a certain level. Alternatively, the electrochromic element 10200 may be discolored when the driving voltage is at a certain level or higher, and the electrochromic element 10200 may be colored when the driving voltage is at a level less than a certain level. When the specific level is 0, the electrochromic element 10200 can change to a colored or decolorized state due to the polarity of the driving voltage.

The degree of discoloration of the electrochromic element 10200 may be determined by the driving voltage value. The degree of discoloration of the electrochromic element 10200 may correspond to a driving voltage value. The degree of coloration or decolorization of the electrochromic element 10200 may be determined by the driving voltage value. For example, when a drive voltage at a first level is applied to electrochromic element 10200, electrochromic element 10200 may be colored to a first degree. When a driving voltage of a second level higher than the first level is applied to the electrochromic element 10200, the electrochromic element 10200 may be colored to a second degree higher than the first degree. That is, when a high level of voltage is supplied to the electrochromic element 10200, the degree of coloration of the electrochromic element 10200 can be higher. When the electrochromic element 10200 is a mirror and a higher voltage is supplied to the electrochromic element 10200, the reflectivity of the electrochromic element 10200 may decrease. When the electrochromic element 10200 is a window and a higher voltage is supplied to the electrochromic element 10200, the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 may decrease.

The storage unit 10140 may store data related to the driving voltage. The storage unit 10140 may store the driving voltage corresponding to the degree of discoloration. The storage unit 10140 may store the driving voltage corresponding to the discoloration degree in the form of a look-up table.

The control unit 10110 may receive the degree of discoloration from the outside, load a driving voltage corresponding to the received degree of discoloration from the storage unit 10140, and control the output unit 10130 to generate a driving voltage corresponding to the received degree of discoloration.

FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic element according to an embodiment of the present application.

3 , the electrochromic element 10200 according to an embodiment may include a first electrode 10210 , an electrochromic layer 10220 , an electrolyte layer 10230 , an ion storage layer 10240 and a second electrode 10250 .

The first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 may be positioned to face each other. The electrochromic layer 10220 , the electrolyte layer 10230 and the ion storage layer 10240 may be located between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 .

The first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 may transmit incident light. Any one of the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 may reflect incident light, and the other may transmit incident light.

When the electrochromic element 10200 is a window, the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 may transmit incident light. When the electrochromic element 10200 is a mirror, any one of the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 may reflect incident light.

When the electrochromic element 10200 is a window, the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 may be formed using transparent electrodes. The first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 may be formed using a transparent conductive material. The first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 may include metal doped with at least one of indium, tin, zinc and/or oxide. For example, the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 may be formed using indium tin oxide (ITO), zinc oxide (ZnO), or indium zinc oxide (IZO).

When the electrochromic element 10200 is a mirror, any one of the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 may be a transparent electrode, and the other may be a reflective electrode. For example, the first electrode 10210 may be a reflective electrode, and the second electrode 10250 may be a transparent electrode. In this case, the first electrode 10210 may be formed using a metal material having high reflectivity. The first electrode 10210 may include at least one of aluminum (Al), copper (Cu), molybdenum (Mo), chromium (Cr), titanium (Ti), gold (Au), silver (Ag), and tungsten (W). . The second electrode 10250 may be formed using a transparent conductive material.

The electrochromic layer 10220 may be located between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250. The electrochromic layer 10220 may be located on the upper surface of the first electrode 10210 .

The optical properties of the electrochromic layer 10220 may be changed due to ion migration in the electrochromic layer 10220. The electrochromic layer 10220 may be discolored due to ion migration in the electrochromic layer 10220 .

Ions may be implanted into the electrochromic layer 10220. When ions are implanted into the electrochromic layer 10220, the optical properties of the electrochromic layer 10220 can be changed. When ions are implanted into the electrochromic layer 10220, the electrochromic layer 10220 may be discolored. When ions are implanted into the electrochromic layer 10220, the electrochromic layer 10220 may be colored or decolorized. When ions are implanted into the electrochromic layer 10220, the light transmittance and/or light absorption rate of the electrochromic layer 10220 may change. The electrochromic layer 10220 may be reduced by ions implanted into the electrochromic layer 10220 . The electrochromic layer 10220 may be reduced and discolored by ions implanted into the electrochromic layer 10220 . The electrochromic layer 10220 may be reduced and colored by ions implanted into the electrochromic layer 10220 . Alternatively, when ions are implanted into the electrochromic layer 10220, the electrochromic layer 10220 may be reduced and decolorized.

The ions implanted into the electrochromic layer 10220 may be released. When ions in the electrochromic layer 10220 are released, the optical properties of the electrochromic layer 10220 can be changed. When ions in the electrochromic layer 10220 are released, the electrochromic layer 10220 may change color. When the ions in the electrochromic layer 10220 are released, the electrochromic layer 10220 may be colored or decolorized. When ions in the electrochromic layer 10220 are released, the light transmittance and/or light absorption rate of the electrochromic layer 10220 may be changed. The electrochromic layer 10220 may be oxidized by releasing ions in the electrochromic layer 10220 . The electrochromic layer 10220 may be oxidized and discolored by releasing ions in the electrochromic layer 10220 . The electrochromic layer 10220 may be oxidized and colored by releasing ions in the electrochromic layer 10220 . Alternatively, when ions in the electrochromic layer 10220 are released, the electrochromic layer 10220 may be oxidized and discolored.

The electrochromic layer 10220 may be formed using a material that changes color due to ion migration. The electrochromic layer 10220 may include at least one oxide of TiO, V2O5, Nb2O5, Cr2O3, FeO2, CoO2, NiO2, RhO2, Ta2O5, IrO2, and WO3. The electrochromic layer 10220 may have a physical internal structure.

The electrolyte layer 10230 may be on the electrochromic layer 10220. The electrolyte layer 10230 may be located between the electrochromic layer 10220 and the second electrode 10250.

The ion storage layer 10240 may be on the electrolyte layer 10230 . The ion storage layer 10240 may be located between the electrolyte layer 10230 and the second electrode 10250 .

The ion storage layer 10240 may store ions. Optical properties of the ion storage layer 10240 may be changed due to ion migration. The ion storage layer 10240 may be discolored due to ion migration.

The ion storage layer 10240 may be implanted with ions. When ions are implanted into the ion storage layer 10240, the optical properties of the ion storage layer 10240 may be changed. When ions are implanted into the ion storage layer 10240, the ion storage layer 10240 may be discolored. When ions are implanted into the ion storage layer 10240, the ion storage layer 10240 may be colored or decolorized. When ions are implanted into the ion storage layer 10240, the light transmittance and/or light absorption rate of the ion storage layer 10240 may be changed. The ion storage layer 10240 may be reduced by ions implanted into the ion storage layer 10240 . The ion storage layer 10240 may be reduced and discolored by ions implanted into the ion storage layer 10240 . The ion storage layer 10240 may be reduced and colored by ions implanted into the ion storage layer 10240 . Alternatively, when ions are implanted into the ion storage layer 10240, the ion storage layer 10240 may be reduced and decolorized.

The ions implanted into the ion storage layer 10240 may be released. When ions in the ion storage layer 10240 are released, the optical properties of the ion storage layer 10240 may change. When ions in the ion storage layer 10240 are released, the ion storage layer 10240 may change color. When ions in the ion storage layer 10240 are released, the ion storage layer 10240 may be colored or decolorized. When ions in the ion storage layer 10240 are released, the light transmittance and/or light absorption rate of the ion storage layer 10240 may change. The ion storage layer 10240 may be oxidized by releasing ions in the ion storage layer 10240 . The ion storage layer 10240 may be oxidized and discolored by releasing ions in the ion storage layer 10240 . The ion storage layer 10240 may be oxidized and colored by releasing ions in the ion storage layer 10240 . Alternatively, when ions in the ion storage layer 10240 are released, the ion storage layer 10240 may be oxidized and discolored.

The ion storage layer 10240 may be formed using a material that changes color due to ion migration. The ion storage layer 10240 may include at least one oxide of IrO2, NiO2, MnO2, CoO2, iridium-magnesium oxide, nickel-magnesium oxide, and titanium-vanadium oxide. The ion storage layer 10240 may have a physical internal structure. The physical internal structure of the ion storage layer 10240 may be different from the physical internal structure of the electrochromic layer 10220 .

The electrolyte layer 10230 may be an ion migration path between the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240. The electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 may exchange ions via the electrolyte layer 10230 . The electrochromic layer 10220 can act as a migration path for ions, but can act as a barrier for electrons. That is, although ions can migrate through the electrochromic layer 10220, electrons cannot migrate through the electrochromic layer 10220. In other words, the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 can exchange ions through the electrolyte layer 10230 , but cannot exchange electrons through the electrolyte layer 10230 .

The electrolyte layer 10230 may include an insulating material. The electrolyte layer 10230 may be solid. The electrolyte layer 10230 may include SiO2, Al2O3, Nb2O3, Ta2O5, LiTaO3, LiNbO3, SiO2, Al2O3, Nb2O3, Ta2O5, LiTaO3, LiNbO3, La2TiO7, La2TiO7, SrZrO3, ZrO2, Y2O3, Nb2O5, La2Ti2O7, LaTiO3, HfO2, La2TiO7, La2TiO7 , at least one of SrZrO3, ZrO2, Y2O3, Nb2O5, La2Ti2O7, LaTiO3 and HfO2.

When ions in the electrochromic layer 10220 are released, the released ions may be implanted into the ion storage layer 10240, and when ions in the ion storage layer 10240 are released, the released ions may be implanted into the electrochromic layer 10220 . Ions can migrate through the electrolyte layer 10230.

The chemical reactions occurring in the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 may be different reactions. Chemical reactions opposite to each other may occur in the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 . When the electrochromic layer 10220 is oxidized, the ion storage layer 10240 may be reduced. When the electrochromic layer 10220 is reduced, the ion storage layer 10240 may be oxidized.

Therefore, the ion storage layer 10240 may serve as a counter electrode for the electrochromic layer 10220 .

The states of the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 may be changed due to ion migration.

State changes corresponding to each other may be induced in the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 . For example, when the electrochromic layer 10220 is colored, the ion storage layer 10240 can also be colored, and when the electrochromic layer 10220 is decolorized, the ion storage layer 10240 can also be decolorized. When the electrochromic layer 10220 is oxidized and colored, the ion storage layer 10240 may be reduced and colored, and when the electrochromic layer 10220 is reduced and colored, the ion storage layer 10240 may be oxidized and colored.

Different state changes from each other may be induced in the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 . For example, when the electrochromic layer 10220 is colored, the ion storage layer 10240 can be decolorized, and when the electrochromic layer 10220 is decolorized, the ion storage layer 10240 can be colored. When the electrochromic layer 10220 is oxidized and colored, the ion storage layer 10240 may be reduced and discolored, and when the electrochromic layer 10220 is oxidized and discolored, the ion storage layer 10240 may be reduced and colored. The electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 may have different transmittances from each other. With the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 having different transmittances from each other, the transmittance can also be adjusted by different state changes of the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 .

For example, since the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 can be determined by the transmittance of the colored layer, in the case where the transmittance when the electrochromic layer 10220 is colored is lower than that when the ion storage layer 10240 is colored, when When the electrochromic layer 10220 is colored, the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 may be lower than the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 when the ion storage layer 10240 is colored. Therefore, the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 can be controlled by changing the colored layer.

4 to 6 are diagrams illustrating state changes during coloring of the electrochromic device according to the embodiment of the present application.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the electrochromic device in an initial state.

Referring to FIG. 4 , the electrochromic element 10200 in an initial state according to an embodiment is electrically connected to the control module 10100 .

The control module 10100 may be electrically connected to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 and supply a voltage to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 .

A plurality of ions 10260 may be located in the ion storage layer 10240. A plurality of ions 10260 may be implanted into the ion storage layer 10240 during the formation of the ion storage layer 10240 . The ions 10260 may be at least one of H+ and Li+.

Although the plurality of ions 10260 are shown in the figures as being located in the ion storage layer 10240, the ions may also be located in at least one of the electrochromic layer 10220 and the electrolyte layer 10230 in the initial state. That is, ions may also be implanted into the electrochromic layer 10220 and the electrolyte layer 10230 during the formation of the electrochromic layer 10220 and the electrolyte layer 10230 .

Due to the plurality of ions 10260 located in the ion storage layer 10240, the ion storage layer 10240 may be in a reduced and discolored state. The ion storage layer 10240 may be in a state capable of transmitting light.

Referring to FIG. 5 , the control module 10100 applies a voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 .

The control module 10100 may apply a voltage to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 . The control module 10100 may apply a low voltage to the first electrode 10210 and a high voltage to the second electrode 10250 . Here, high voltage and low voltage are relative concepts, and the voltage applied to the second electrode 10250 may be a voltage at a relatively higher level than the voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 . Due to the voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250, a potential difference is generated between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250.

Electrons may be injected into the first electrode 10210 by a voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 . Electrons may migrate from the control module 10100 toward the first electrode 10210 . Because the control module 10100 and the first electrode 10210 are connected to each other at the contact area on one side of the first electrode 10210, electrons migrated to the contact area through the control module 10100 may migrate along the first electrode 10210 to the other side of the first electrode 10210 . The electrons are arranged in the entire area of the first electrode 10210 through the migration of electrons from one side of the first electrode 10210 to the other side.

Because the electrons have different polarities from the plurality of ions 10260 in the ion storage layer 10240, the electrons and the ions 10260 may migrate in directions close to each other due to the Coulomb force between the electrons and the plurality of ions. The electrons and ions 10260 can migrate to the electrochromic layer 10220 due to the Coulomb force between them. Electrons may migrate toward the second electrode 10250 and be injected into the electrochromic layer 10220 due to the Coulomb force with the ions. Due to the Coulomb force with electrons, the ions 10260 may migrate toward the first electrode 10210 and be injected into the electrochromic layer 10220 . Here, since the electrolyte layer 10230 serves as a migration path of the ions 10260 and blocks the migration of electrons, the electrons and the ions 10260 may remain in the electrochromic layer 10220.

By implanting ions 10260 into the electrochromic layer 10220, the electrochromic layer 10220 that gains ions can be reduced and colored, and the ion storage layer 10240 that loses ions can be oxidized and colored. That is, the electrochromic element 10200 may be discolored due to the migration of the ions 10260 . More specifically, the electrochromic element 10200 may be colored due to the migration of ions 10260 .

The migration of electrons in the horizontal direction in the first electrode 10210 and the migration of electrons in the vertical direction toward the second electrode 10250 may occur simultaneously. That is, electrons may migrate toward the second electrode 10250 while migrating in the horizontal direction in the first electrode 10210 and be injected into the electrochromic layer 10220 . Due to the complex migration of electrons in the horizontal and vertical directions, the ions 10260 located in the ion storage layer 10240 may also migrate first in the region where the electrons are injected.

That is, ions in a region adjacent to the contact region in which the first electrode 10210 and the control module 10100 are electrically connected may first migrate to the electrochromic layer 10220 and electrically connect with the first electrode 10210 and the control module 10100 therein. The ions in the regions spaced apart by the connected contact regions can migrate to the electrochromic layer 10220 later. In this way, the areas of the electrochromic element 10200 adjacent to the contact area can be discolored first, and the areas of the electrochromic element 10200 spaced from the contact area can be discolored later. For example, when the contact area is located at the outer boundary area of the electrochromic element 10200, the electrochromic element 10200 may change color in order from the outer boundary area to the central area. That is, the electrochromic element 10200 may be colored in order from the outer boundary region to the central region.

The degree of discoloration of the electrochromic element 10200 may be proportional to the amount of electrons injected through the control module 10100 . The degree of discoloration of the electrochromic element 10200 may be proportional to the degree of discoloration of the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 . The number of electrons injected through the control module 10100 may be determined by the voltage values applied to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 through the control module 10100 . The number of electrons injected through the control module 10100 may be determined by the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 . That is, by adjusting the level of the voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200, the control module 10100 can control the degree of discoloration of the electrochromic element 10200.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the positions of ions when color change is completed in the electrochromic element 10200 .

Referring to FIG. 6 , when the implantation of electrons injected through the control module 10100 and ions 10260 migrated due to the electrons into the electrochromic layer 10220 is completed, the state of the electrochromic element 10200 is maintained.

That is, the colored state of the electrochromic element 10200 is maintained. This can be called the memory effect.

Even when the control module 10100 does not apply a voltage to the electrochromic element 10200, ions existing in the electrochromic layer 10220 stay in the electrochromic layer 10220, and in this way, the electrochromic element 10200 can be maintained shaded state.

7 to 9 are diagrams illustrating state changes during decolorization of the electrochromic device according to the embodiment of the present application.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the electrochromic device in an initial state.

Referring to FIG. 7 , the electrochromic element 10200 in an initial state according to an embodiment is electrically connected to the control module 10100 .

Because the electrochromic element 10200 is in a colored state, a plurality of ions 10260 may be located in the electrochromic layer 10220.

Due to the plurality of ions 10260 located in the electrochromic element 10200, the electrochromic layer 10220 can be in an oxidized and colored state, and the ion storage layer 10240 can be in a reduced and colored state.

Referring to FIG. 8 , the control module 10100 applies a voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 .

The control module 10100 may apply a voltage to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 . The control module 10100 may apply a high voltage to the first electrode 10210 and a low voltage to the second electrode 10250 . Here, high voltage and low voltage are relative concepts, and the voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 may be a voltage at a relatively higher level than the voltage applied to the second electrode 10250 . Due to the voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250, a potential difference is generated between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250. The potential difference during decolorization may be in the opposite direction to the potential difference during coloring of FIGS. 4 to 6 . That is, in the coloring process, the voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 may be a voltage at a lower level than the voltage applied to the second electrode 10250, and in the decolorizing process, the voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 may be lower than the voltage applied to the second electrode 10250. The voltage applied to the second electrode 10250 is at a higher level voltage.

Electrons may be injected into the second electrode 10250 by a voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 . Electrons may migrate from the control module 10100 toward the second electrode 10250 . Because the control module 10100 and the second electrode 10250 are connected to each other at the contact area on one side of the second electrode 10250, electrons migrated to the contact area through the control module 10100 may migrate along the second electrode 10250 to the other side of the second electrode 10250 . The electrons are arranged in the entire area of the second electrode 10250 through the migration of electrons from one side of the second electrode 10250 to the other side.

Because the electrons have a different polarity from the plurality of ions 10260 in the electrochromic layer 10220, the electrons and the ions 10260 may migrate in directions close to each other due to the Coulomb force between the electrons and the plurality of ions. The electrons and ions 10260 may migrate to the ion storage layer 10240 due to the Coulomb force between the electrons and the ions 10260 . Due to the Coulomb force with the ions 10260, electrons may migrate toward the first electrode 10210 and be injected into the ion storage layer 10240. Due to the Coulomb force with electrons, the ions 10260 may migrate toward the second electrode 10250 and be implanted into the ion storage layer 10240 . Here, since the electrolyte layer 10230 serves as a migration path of the ions 10260 and blocks the migration of electrons, the electrons and the ions 10260 may remain in the ion storage layer 10240.

By implanting ions 10260 into the ion storage layer 10240, the ion storage layer 10240 that gains ions may be oxidized and decolorized, and the electrochromic layer 10220 that loses ions may be reduced and decolorized. That is, the electrochromic element 10200 may be discolored due to the migration of the ions 10260 . More specifically, the electrochromic element 10200 may be discolored due to the migration of ions 10260.

The migration of electrons in the horizontal direction in the second electrode 10250 and the migration of electrons in the vertical direction toward the first electrode 10210 may occur simultaneously. That is, electrons may migrate toward the first electrode 10210 while migrating in the horizontal direction in the second electrode 10250 and be injected into the ion storage layer 10240 . Due to the complex migration of electrons in the horizontal and vertical directions, the ions 10260 located in the electrochromic layer 10220 can also migrate first in the region where the electrons are injected.

That is, ions in a region adjacent to the contact region in which the second electrode 10250 and the control module 10100 are electrically connected may migrate to the ion storage layer 10240 first, and the ions in the region adjacent to the second electrode 10250 and the control module 10100 may migrate to the ion storage layer 10240 first. Ions in the regions spaced apart by the electrically connected contact regions can later migrate to the ion storage layer 10240. In this way, the areas of the electrochromic element 10200 adjacent to the contact area can be discolored first, and the areas of the electrochromic element 10200 spaced from the contact area can be discolored later. For example, when the contact area is located at the outer boundary area of the electrochromic element 10200, the electrochromic element 10200 may change color in order from the outer boundary area to the central area. That is, the electrochromic element 10200 may be sequentially colored from the outer boundary region to the central region.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the positions of ions when color change is completed in the electrochromic element 10200 .

Referring to FIG. 9 , when the implantation of electrons injected through the control module 10100 and ions 10260 migrated due to the electrons into the ion storage layer 10240 is completed, the state of the electrochromic element 10200 is maintained.

That is, the discolored state of the electrochromic element 10200 can be maintained.

1.1 Apply voltage to the electrochromic element

FIG. 10 is a graph showing voltages applied to an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 10 , in the electrochromic device according to the embodiment, the control module 10100 may apply power to the electrochromic element 10200 .

The control module 10100 may apply a voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 . The voltage applied here may be a potential difference applied between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250.

The control module 10100 can apply a voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 during the application phase and the sustain phase.

The application stage may be a stage in which the electrochromic element 10200 is discolored by the control module 10100 . The application stage may be a stage in which the electrochromic element 10200 is discolored to a target discoloration level by the control module 10100 . The application phase may include an initial discoloration phase and a discoloration level change phase.

The initial discoloration stage may be defined as a stage in which a voltage for discoloring the electrochromic element 10200 is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 in a state where no voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 . The discoloration level changing stage may be defined as a stage in which the electrochromic element 10200 is discolored to a different discoloration level in a state where the electrochromic element 10200 is discolored to a specific discoloration level.

The sustain phase refers to a phase in which a sustain voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 to maintain the state of the electrochromic element 10200 . The control module 10100 may apply a sustain voltage in the form of pulses to the electrochromic element 10200 to maintain the state of the electrochromic element 10200 during the sustain phase. The control module 10100 may periodically apply a sustain voltage in the form of pulses to the electrochromic element 10200 to maintain the state of the electrochromic element 10200 during the sustain phase.

That is, in the sustain phase, the control module 10100 may apply a voltage at a high level to the electrochromic element 10200 during a certain period of time, and apply a voltage at a low level to the electrochromic element 10200 during the remaining period, instead of applying the voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 at a low level. Continuously applied to the electrochromic element 10200. The control module 10100 may periodically apply a voltage at a high level to the electrochromic element 10200, and apply a voltage at a low level to the electrochromic element 10200 during the remaining period. In the sustain phase, by applying a sustain voltage in the form of pulses to the electrochromic element 10200 , the control module 10100 can reduce power consumption for state maintenance as compared to a method of continuously applying a voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 .

Regarding the electrochromic element 10200, a period other than the application phase may be referred to as a sustain phase, and the control module 10100 may apply a sustain voltage in pulses to the electrochromic element 10200 at predetermined intervals during the sustain phase. By applying a sustain voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 during the sustain phase, the control module 10100 can restore the electrochromic element 10200 that is naturally discolored to a different discoloration level that is not the target discoloration level to the target discoloration level over time, and maintain the electrochromic element 10200 discoloration is the target discoloration level.

Since the natural discoloration of the electrochromic element 10200 is proportional to time after the application phase ends, the period of the pulsed sustain voltage applied in the sustain phase can be controlled according to when the application phase ends. For example, when the period after the end of the application phase of the electrochromic element 10200 is relatively long, the control module 10100 may set the period during which the sustain voltage at a high level is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 to be relatively long, and when When the time after the end of the application phase of the electrochromic element 10200 is relatively short, the control module 10100 may set the period during which the sustain voltage at a high level is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 to be set relatively short.

The natural discoloration of the electrochromic element 10200 can be proportional to the level of discoloration of the electrochromic element that is discolored during the application phase.

That is, an electrochromic element 10200 that has a relatively high degree of discoloration during the application phase can have a relatively high degree of natural discoloration. In other words, in the case where the electrochromic element 10200 has a high degree of discoloration in the application stage, the difference between the target discoloration level in the application stage and the discoloration level after natural discoloration can be relatively large. In this case, for the electrochromic element 10200 having a high degree of discoloration during the application phase, the control module 10100 can maintain the period during which the sustain voltage at a high level is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 for a relatively long period of time.

An electrochromic element 10200 having a relatively low degree of discoloration during the application stage may have a relatively low degree of natural discoloration. In other words, where the electrochromic element 10200 has a low degree of discoloration in the application stage, the difference between the target discoloration level in the application stage and the discoloration level after natural discoloration can be relatively small. In this case, for the electrochromic element 10200 having a low degree of discoloration during the application phase, the control module 10100 can maintain a relatively short period during which a sustain voltage at a high level is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 .

During the application phase, the control module 10100 may maintain the voltage at a predetermined level after a rise period. The rising period of the applying phase may be different from the rising period of the sustaining phase. The rising period of the applying phase may be longer than the rising period of the sustaining phase.

In the applying phase, the control module 10100 may apply a voltage such that the slope of the applied voltage has a first angle θ1 during the rising period, and then maintain the voltage at a predetermined level. In the maintenance phase, the control module 10100 may apply a voltage such that the slope of the applied voltage has a second angle θ2 during the rising period, and then maintain the voltage at a predetermined level. The first angle θ1 may be different from the second angle θ2. The first angle θ1 may be smaller than the second angle θ2. The second angle θ1 may be a right angle.

During the application phase, the control module 10100 may relatively gradually increase the voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 to prevent the interior of the electrochromic element 10200 from being electrically damaged. That is, in the application stage, the control module 10100 can set the rising period to be relatively long and prevent the inside of the electrochromic element 10200 from being electrically damaged. In other words, in the application stage, the control module 10100 may apply a voltage such that the first angle θ1 is an acute angle and prevent the inside of the electrochromic element 10200 from being damaged.

The first angle θ1 may be changed based on the applied voltage at a predetermined level. Since damage to the inside of the electrochromic element 10200 depends on the applied voltage value at a predetermined level, the first angle θ1 may be increased when the voltage value at the predetermined level is large, and may be increased when the voltage value at the predetermined level is small Decrease the first angle θ1.

In the sustaining stage, since an internal voltage exists in the electrochromic element 10200 due to discoloration, the inside of the electrochromic element 10200 may not be electrically damaged even when the voltage increases sharply. Therefore, during the sustain phase, the control module may set the rise period to be relatively short and increase the speed at which the electrochromic element 10200 returns to the target discoloration level.

However, when the electrochromic element 10200 is restored to the initial state in which the electrochromic element 10200 is not discolored due to natural discoloration, a voltage whose second angle θ2 is an acute angle can be applied to the electrochromic element 10200 even in the sustaining stage.

1.2 Coloring process of electrochromic equipment

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing internal potentials in an electrochromic device before a voltage is applied to the electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 11 , the electrochromic element 10200 may be connected to the control module 10100 . The electrochromic element 10200 may include a first electrode 10210 , an electrochromic layer 10220 , an electrolyte layer 10230 , an ion storage layer 10240 and a second electrode 10250 .

Before applying a voltage to the electrochromic element 10200, the electrochromic element 10200 may be in a decolorized state. A plurality of ions 10260 may be located in the ion storage layer 10240 of the electrochromic element 10200.

Each layer of electrochromic element 10200 may have an internal potential. The internal potential may be a ground-based potential. The internal potential of the second electrode 10250 may be defined as the first internal potential Va, the internal potential of the ion storage layer 10240 may be defined as the second internal potential Vb, the internal potential of the electrochromic layer 10220 may be defined as the third internal potential Vc, and The internal potential of the first electrode 10210 may be defined as a fourth internal potential Vd.

When no voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200, since no voltage is applied to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250, the first internal potential Va and the fourth internal potential Vd may be 0.

The electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 may have internal potentials. The second internal potential Vb of the ion storage layer 10240 and the third internal potential Vc of the electrochromic layer 10220 may have different values.

The second internal potential Vb and the third internal potential Vc may be built-in potentials. The second internal potential Vb and the third internal potential Vc may vary due to at least one of material properties of the respective layers, relationships with materials of adjacent layers, and ions included in the respective layers.

The second internal potential Vb may be determined by the energy level of the material constituting the ion storage layer 10240 .

Alternatively, the second internal potential Vb may be determined by the difference between the energy levels of the ion storage layer 10240 and the electrolyte layer 10230 . Alternatively, the second internal potential Vb may be determined by the difference between the energy levels of the ion storage layer 10240 and the second electrode 10250 . Even when the second internal potential Vb is determined by the difference between the energy levels of the ion storage layer 10240 and the layer adjacent to the ion storage layer 10240, the second internal potential Vb can be marked as ion storage as shown in FIG. 11 Internal potential of layer 10240.

The second internal potential Vb may be determined by the ions 10260 included in the ion storage layer 10240 . The second internal potential Vb may be determined by the number of ions 10260 included in the ion storage layer 10240 .

The second internal potential Vb may be determined by at least one of the energy level of the above-described ion storage layer 10240 itself, the difference between the energy levels of the ion storage layer 10240 and the layers adjacent to the ion storage layer 10240, and the inclusion in The ions 10260 in the ion storage layer 10240. Alternatively, the second internal potential Vb may pass through the energy level of the ion storage layer 10240 itself, the difference between the energy levels of the ion storage layer 10240 and the layers adjacent to the ion storage layer 10240 , and the energy level included in the ion storage layer 10240 . combination of ions 10260 to determine.

The third internal potential Vc may be determined by the energy level of the material constituting the electrochromic layer 10220 .

Alternatively, the third internal potential Vc may be determined by the difference between the energy levels of the electrochromic layer 10220 and the first electrode 10210 . Alternatively, the third internal potential Vc may be determined by the difference between the energy levels of the electrochromic layer 10240 and the electrolyte layer 10230 . Even when the third internal potential Vc is determined by the difference between the energy levels of the electrochromic layer 10220 and the layers adjacent to the electrochromic layer 10220, the third internal potential can be marked as the electrical potential as shown in FIG. 11 . The internal potential of the photochromic layer 10220.

The third internal potential Vc may be determined by ions included in the electrochromic layer 10220 . The third potential Vc may be determined by the number of ions included in the electrochromic layer 10220 .

The third internal potential Vc may be determined by at least one of the following: the energy level of the electrochromic layer 10220 itself, the difference between the energy levels of the electrochromic layer 10220 and the layers adjacent to the electrochromic layer 10220, and Ions 10260 included in the electrochromic layer 10220. Alternatively, the third internal potential Vc may be determined by the above-described energy level of the electrochromic layer 10220 itself, the difference between the energy levels of the electrochromic layer 10220 and the layers adjacent to the electrochromic layer 10220, and the inclusion in the electrochromic layer 10220. The combination of ions 10260 in layer 10220 is determined.

FIG. 12 is a graph showing a potential change in an initial stage of coloring in an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 12 , the electrochromic element 10200 according to an embodiment may be electrically connected to the control module 10100 .

The control module 10100 may provide voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 . The control module 10100 may provide a voltage to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 of the electrochromic element 10200 . The control module 10100 may apply a low voltage to the first electrode 10210 and a high voltage to the second electrode 10250 .

When a high voltage is applied to the second electrode 10250, the internal potential of the second electrode 10250 may rise corresponding to the applied high voltage. The first internal potential Va of the second electrode 10250 may rise corresponding to the voltage supplied to the second electrode 10250 through the control module 10100 .

Since the second electrode 10250 and the ion storage layer 10240 are electrically connected, as the internal potential of the second electrode 10250 rises, the internal potential of the ion storage layer 10240 also rises. Due to the rise of the first internal potential Va, the second internal potential Vb also rises corresponding to the first internal potential Va. The first internal potential Va and the second internal potential Vb may be at the same level. Alternatively, the first internal potential Va and the second internal potential Vb may be at different levels. The first internal potential Va may have a higher value than the second internal potential Vb.

As the internal potential of the ion storage layer 10240 rises, a potential difference may be generated between the ion storage layer 10240 and the electrochromic layer 10220 . Due to the rise of the second internal potential Vb, a potential difference may be generated between the second internal potential Vb and the third internal potential Vc.

The ions 10260 existing in the ion storage layer 10240 may migrate due to the potential difference between the second internal potential Vb and the third internal potential Vc. Due to the potential difference between the second internal potential Vb and the third internal potential Vc, the ions 10260 may migrate to the electrochromic layer 10220 via the electrolyte layer 10230 .

When the potential difference between the second internal potential Vb and the third internal potential Vc is higher than a predetermined range, the ions 10260 may migrate to the electrochromic layer 10220 via the electrolyte layer 10230 . The electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 may be discolored due to the migration of the ions 10260 . The ion storage layer 10240 may be oxidized and discolored due to the loss of ions 10260 through the migration of ions 10260 from the ion storage layer 10240 to the electrochromic layer 10220 , and the electrochromic layer 10220 may be reduced and discolored due to the acquisition of ions 10260 . The ion storage layer 10240 may be oxidized and colored due to the loss of ions 10260, and the electrochromic layer 10220 may be reduced and colored due to the gain of ions 10260. The electrochromic element 10200 may be colored by the ion storage layer 10240 and the electrochromic layer 10220 being colored. By coloring the ion storage layer 10240 and the electrochromic layer 10220, the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 can be reduced.

The ions 10260 in the ion storage layer 10240 may exist in a state where the ions 10260 are combined with the material constituting the ion storage layer 10240 . The ions 10260 in the ion storage layer 10240 may exist in a form in which the ions 10260 are physically intercalated between particles of the material constituting the ion storage layer 10240 . Alternatively, the ions in the ion storage layer 10240 may exist in a state where the ions are chemically combined with the material constituting the ion storage layer 10240 .

A potential difference higher than a predetermined range is required to release the bond between the ions 10260 present in the ion storage layer 10240 and the material constituting the ion storage layer 10240 . The minimum voltage required to release the bond between the ions 10260 and the material constituting the ion storage layer 10240 may be defined as a first threshold voltage Vth1. When the potential difference between the second internal potential Vb and the third internal potential Vc is the first threshold voltage Vth1 or higher, the ions 10260 may migrate to the electrochromic layer 10220 .

Through the migration of the ions 10260 to the electrochromic layer 10220, the internal potential of the electrochromic layer 10220 may rise. Through the migration of the ions 10260 to the electrochromic layer 10220, the third internal potential Vc may rise.

FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a potential change in a coloring completion stage in an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 13 , the electrochromic element 10200 according to an embodiment may be connected to the control module 10100 and receive a voltage.

Due to the high voltage applied to the second electrode 10250 in FIG. 12, the second internal potential Vb rises, and due to the potential difference between the second internal potential Vb and the third internal potential Vc, the ions existing in the ion storage layer 10240 Ion 10260 migrates.

FIG. 13 shows a state in which the migration of ions 10260 is completed. Through the migration of the ions 10260 to the electrochromic layer 10220, the internal potential of the electrochromic layer 10220 may rise. Through the migration of the ions 10260 to the electrochromic layer 10220, the third internal potential Vc may rise.

The internal potential of the electrochromic layer 10220 may rise to a predetermined level. The third internal potential Vc may rise to a predetermined level. The third internal potential Vc may rise until the difference between the third internal potential Vc and the second internal potential Vb is a predetermined level. The third internal potential Vc may rise until the third internal potential Vc differs from the second internal potential Vb by the first threshold voltage Vth1. That is, in the coloring completion stage, the difference between the third internal potential Vc and the second internal potential Vb may be the same as the magnitude of the first threshold voltage Vth1.

The ions 10260 migrate according to the potential difference between the second internal potential Vb and the third internal potential Vc, and the third internal potential Vc also rises due to the migration of the ions 10260 . When the difference between the second internal potential Vb and the third internal potential Vc is smaller than the magnitude of the first threshold voltage Vth1, the ions 10260 cannot migrate. Therefore, the third internal potential Vc may only rise to a value obtained by subtracting the first threshold voltage Vth1 from the second internal potential Vb. The third internal potential Vc may be maintained as long as the second internal potential Vb is not changed.

FIG. 14 is a graph showing the relationship between the voltage applied to the electrochromic device and the transmittance of the electrochromic device according to the embodiment of the present application.

The voltage in FIG. 14 may refer to a potential difference due to the voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250. As shown in FIG. 11, the initial state of the electrochromic element 10200 is a discolored state. The ion storage layer 10240 of the electrochromic element 10200 includes a plurality of ions 10260 .

Even when the voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 rises, the transmittance does not change up to a predetermined level. The plurality of ions 10260 existing in the ion storage layer 10240 do not migrate to the electrochromic layer 10220 until the potential difference applied between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 reaches a predetermined level. Since the plurality of ions 10260 existing in the ion storage layer 10240 migrate at a voltage equal to or higher than the first threshold voltage Vth1, when the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 is smaller than the first threshold voltage Vth1 , the ions 10260 do not migrate and migrate only when the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 is equal to or higher than the first threshold voltage Vth1.

Therefore, when the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 is smaller than the first threshold voltage Vth1, migration of the ions 10260 does not occur, and thus the electrochromic element 10200 does not change color. When the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 is equal to or higher than the first threshold voltage Vth1, the ions 10260 migrate, and the electrochromic element 10200 is discolored. Therefore, when the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 is smaller than the first threshold voltage Vth1, the transmittance does not change, and when the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 is equal to or higher than At the first threshold voltage Vth1, the transmittance changes.

When the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 is equal to or higher than the first threshold voltage Vth1, the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 are colored, and the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 gradually decreases. The transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 may be reduced to a predetermined transmittance.

By applying a voltage equal to or higher than the first threshold voltage Vth1 to the electrochromic element 10200, the control module 10100 may change the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200. By applying the first voltage V1 to the electrochromic element 10200, the control module 10100 can discolor the electrochromic element 10200 so that the electrochromic element 10200 has the first transmittance T1. By applying the second voltage V2 to the electrochromic element 10200, the control module 10100 can discolor the electrochromic element 10200 so that the electrochromic element 10200 has the second transmittance T2. In this case, the first voltage V1 may be lower than the second voltage V2, and the first transmittance T1 may be higher than the second transmittance T2.

By applying a voltage equal to or higher than the first threshold voltage Vth1 to the electrochromic element 10200 , the control module 10100 can change the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 regardless of the current state of the electrochromic element 10200 . By applying the second voltage V2 to the electrochromic element 10200 in a state where the electrochromic element 10200 has the maximum transmittance Ta, the control module 10100 can discolor the electrochromic element 10200 so that the electrochromic element 10200 has the second transmittance rate T2. By applying the second voltage V2 to the electrochromic element 10200 in a state where the electrochromic element 10200 has the first transmittance T1, the control module 10100 can discolor the electrochromic element 10200 so that the electrochromic element 10200 has the second Transmittance T2.

Because the voltage value applied to the electrochromic element 10200 is controlled by the control module 10100 regardless of the current state of the electrochromic element 10200, the electrochromic element 10200 can be discolored to have a desired transmittance, and thus is used to measure the current state of the electrochromic element 10200. The configuration of the current state can be omitted.

The control module 10100 may control the electrochromic element 10200 to change color based on the driving voltage corresponding to the degree of color change stored in the storage unit 10140 of the control module 10100 to have a desired transmittance.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a potential when voltage application is released after color change is completed in the electrochromic device according to the embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 15 , the electrochromic element 10200 according to an embodiment may be electrically connected to the control module 10100 .

After the discoloration is completed, the control module 10100 may release the voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 . The control module 10100 and the first electrode 10210 may be electrically insulated, and the control module 10100 and the second electrode 10250 may be electrically insulated. The first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 may float.

Since the voltage applied to the second electrode 10250 is removed, the internal potential of the second electrode 10250 may drop. The first internal potential Va may drop.

Due to the drop in the internal potential of the second electrode 10250, the internal potential of the ion storage layer 10240 connected to the second electrode 10250 may also drop. Due to the drop of the first internal potential Va, the second internal potential Vb may drop.

Even when the internal potential of the ion storage layer 10240 drops and a potential difference is generated between the internal potential of the ion storage layer 10240 and the internal potential of the electrochromic layer 10220, the ions 10260 may stay in the electrochromic layer 10220.

By the presence of the ions 10260 in the electrochromic layer 10220, even when the voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 from the control module 10100 is released, the colored state of the electrochromic element 10200 can be maintained. This can be defined as the memory effect.

Since the colored state can be maintained due to the memory effect even when no voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200, the power for maintaining the state of the electrochromic element 10200 is reduced, whereby power consumption can be reduced.

Even when the electrochromic element 10200 has a memory effect, the ions 10260 can migrate naturally over time, and the degree of discoloration of the electrochromic element 10200 can change. This can be defined as the leakage effect. The leakage effect can be proportional to time. Due to the leakage effect, the electrochromic element 10200 may naturally change color.

1.3 Decolorization process of electrochromic equipment

15 is a diagram showing the electrochromic device when the voltage application is released after color changing is completed according to an embodiment of the present application, and is a view showing before a voltage is applied to the electrochromic device in a state where the electrochromic device is colored diagram of the internal potential.

Referring to FIG. 15 , the electrochromic element 10200 may be connected to the control module 10100 .

In the initial state, the control module 10100 does not apply voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 . The control module 10100 does not apply voltage to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 .

In the initial state, a plurality of ions 10260 may be located in the electrochromic layer 10260 . The electrochromic element 10200 may be in a colored state by the plurality of ions 10260 present in the electrochromic layer 10220.

The electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 may have internal potentials. The internal potential of the electrochromic layer 10220 and the internal potential of the ion storage layer 10240 may be different from each other. The internal potential of the electrochromic layer 10220 may be higher than that of the ion storage layer 10240 .

The second internal potential Vb may be different from the third internal potential Vc. The second internal potential Vb may be lower than the third internal potential Vc.

FIG. 16 is a graph showing a potential change in an initial stage of decolorization in an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

Referring to FIG. 16 , the electrochromic element 10200 according to an embodiment may be electrically connected to the control module 10100 .

The control module 10100 may provide voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 . The control module 10100 may provide a voltage to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 of the electrochromic element 10200 . The control module 10100 may apply a high voltage to the first electrode 10210 and a low voltage to the second electrode 10250 .

When a high voltage is applied to the first electrode 10210 , the internal potential of the first electrode 10210 may rise corresponding to the high voltage applied by the control module 10100 . The fourth internal potential Vd of the first electrode 10210 may rise to correspond to the voltage provided by the control module 10100 .

Since the first electrode 10210 and the electrochromic layer 10220 are electrically connected, as the fourth internal potential Vd of the first electrode 10210 increases, the third internal potential Vc of the electrochromic layer 10220 also increases.

The third internal potential Vc and the fourth internal potential Vd may be at the same level. Alternatively, the third internal potential Vc and the fourth internal potential Vd may be at different levels. The fourth internal potential Vd may have a higher value than the third internal potential Vc.

As the third internal potential Vc of the electrochromic layer 10220 rises, a potential difference may be generated between the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 . Due to the rise of the third internal potential Vc, a potential difference between the third internal potential Vc and the second internal potential Vb may be generated.

The ions 10260 existing in the electrochromic layer 10220 may migrate due to the potential difference between the third internal potential Vc and the second internal potential Vb. Due to the potential difference between the third internal potential Vc and the second internal potential Vb, the ions 10260 may migrate to the ion storage layer 10240 via the electrolyte layer 10230 .

When the potential difference between the third internal potential Vc and the second internal potential Vb is higher than a predetermined range, the ions 10260 may migrate to the ion storage layer 10240 via the electrolyte layer 10230 . Due to the migration of ions 10260, the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 may change color. The electrochromic layer 10220 may be oxidized and discolored due to loss of ions 10260 , and the ion storage layer 10240 may be reduced and discolored due to gain of ions 10260 . The electrochromic layer 10220 may be oxidized and decolorized, and the ion storage layer 10240 may be reduced and decolorized. By decolorizing the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240, the electrochromic element 10200 can be decolorized. By decolorizing the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240, the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 can be increased.

The ions 10260 in the electrochromic layer 10220 may exist in a state where the ions 10260 are combined with the material constituting the electrochromic layer 10220 . The ions 10260 in the electrochromic layer 10220 may exist in a form in which the ions 10260 are physically intercalated between particles of the material constituting the electrochromic layer 10220 . Alternatively, the ions 10260 in the electrochromic layer 10220 may exist in a state in which the ions 10260 are chemically combined with the material constituting the electrochromic layer 10220 .

A potential difference higher than a predetermined range is required to release the bond between the ions 10260 present in the electrochromic layer 10220 and the material constituting the electrochromic layer 10220 . The minimum voltage required to release the bond between the ions 10260 and the material constituting the electrochromic layer 10220 may be defined as the second threshold voltage Vth2. When the potential difference between the third internal potential Vc and the second internal potential Vd is the second threshold voltage Vth2 or higher, the ions 10260 may migrate to the ion storage layer 10240.

The strength of the physical and/or chemical bonding between the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ions 10260 and the strength of the physical and/or chemical bonding between the ion storage layer 10240 and the ions 10260 may be different from each other. Because the physical structures of the inner materials of the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 are different, the strength of the physical bond with the ions 10260 may be different. Also, because the chemical structures of the inner materials of the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 are different, the strength of chemical bonding with the ions 10260 may be different.

Therefore, the second threshold voltage Vth2 of the electrochromic layer 10220 may be different from the first threshold voltage of the ion storage layer 10240 .

By the ions 10260 migrating to the ion storage layer 10240, the internal potential of the ion storage layer 10240 may rise. By the ions 10260 migrating to the ion storage layer 10240, the second internal potential Vb may rise.

FIG. 17 is a graph showing a potential change in a decolorization completion state in the electrochromic device according to the embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 17 , the electrochromic element 10200 according to an embodiment may be connected to the control module 10100 and receive a voltage.

Due to the high voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 in FIG. 16, the third internal potential Vc rises, and due to the potential difference between the third internal potential Vc and the second internal potential Vb, the voltage present in the electrochromic layer 10220 The ions 10260 migrate to the ion storage layer 10240.

FIG. 17 shows a state in which the migration of ions 10260 is completed. By migrating the ions 10260 to the ion storage layer 10240, the second internal potential Vb may rise.

The internal potential of the ion storage layer 10240 may rise to a predetermined level. The second internal potential Vb may rise to a predetermined level. The second internal potential Vb may rise until the second internal potential Vb differs from the third internal potential Vc by the second threshold voltage Vth2. That is, in the decolorization completion stage, the difference between the third internal potential Vc and the second internal potential Vb may be the same as the magnitude of the second threshold voltage Vth2.

The ions 10260 migrate according to the potential difference between the third internal potential Vc and the second internal potential Vb, and the second internal potential Vb also rises due to the migration of the ions 10260 . When the difference between the third internal potential Vc and the second internal potential Vb is smaller than the magnitude of the second threshold voltage Vth2, the ions 10260 cannot migrate. Therefore, the second internal potential Vb may only rise to a value obtained by subtracting the second threshold voltage Vth2 from the third internal potential Vc. As long as the third internal potential Vc does not change, the second internal potential Vb may be maintained.

When the voltage application from the control module 10100 is released after the color change is completed, the electrochromic element 10200 may return to the state shown in FIG. 10 .

FIG. 18 is a graph showing the relationship between the voltage applied to the electrochromic device and the transmittance of the electrochromic device according to the embodiment of the present application.

The voltage in FIG. 18 may refer to a potential difference due to the voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250. The voltage may be a potential difference due to a voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 with respect to the second electrode 10250 . As shown in FIG. 15, the initial state of the electrochromic element 10200 is a colored state. The electrochromic layer 10220 of the electrochromic element 10200 includes a plurality of ions 10260 .

Even when the voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 rises, the transmittance does not change up to a predetermined level. The plurality of ions 10260 existing in the electrochromic layer 10220 do not migrate to the ion storage layer 10240 until the potential difference applied between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 reaches a predetermined level. Since the plurality of ions 10260 existing in the electrochromic layer 10220 migrate at a voltage equal to or higher than the second threshold voltage Vth2, when the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 is less than the second threshold voltage Vth2 , the ions 10260 do not migrate, and migrate only when the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 is equal to or higher than the second threshold voltage Vth2.

Therefore, when the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 is smaller than the second threshold voltage Vth2, the migration of the ions 10260 does not occur, and thus the electrochromic element 10200 does not change color. When the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 is equal to or higher than the second threshold voltage Vth2, the ions 10260 migrate, and the electrochromic element 10200 is discolored. Therefore, when the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 is smaller than the second threshold voltage Vth2, the transmittance does not change, and when the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 is equal to or higher than At the second threshold voltage Vth2, the transmittance changes.

When the potential difference between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 is equal to or higher than the second threshold voltage Vth2, the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 are decolorized, and the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 is gradually increased . The transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 may be increased to a predetermined transmittance.

By applying a voltage equal to or higher than the second threshold voltage Vth2 to the electrochromic element 10200, the control module 10100 may change the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200. By applying the third voltage V3 to the electrochromic element 10200, the control module 10100 can discolor the electrochromic element 10200 so that the electrochromic element 10200 has a third transmittance T3. By applying the fourth voltage V4 to the electrochromic element 10200, the control module 10100 may discolor the electrochromic element 10200 so that the electrochromic element 10200 has a fourth transmittance T4. In this case, the third voltage V3 may be lower than the fourth voltage V4, and the third transmittance T3 may be lower than the fourth transmittance T4.

By applying a voltage equal to or higher than the second threshold voltage Vth2 to the electrochromic element 10200 , the control module 10100 can change the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 regardless of the current state of the electrochromic element 10200 . By applying the fourth voltage V4 to the electrochromic element 10200 in a state where the electrochromic element 10200 has the minimum transmittance Tb, the control module 10100 can discolor the electrochromic element 10200 so that the electrochromic element 10200 has the fourth transmittance T4. By applying the fourth voltage V4 to the electrochromic element 10200 in a state where the electrochromic element 10200 has the third transmittance T3, the control module 10100 can discolor the electrochromic element 10200 so that the electrochromic element 10200 has the fourth transmittance rate T4.

Because the voltage value applied to the electrochromic element 10200 is controlled by the control module 10100, regardless of the current state of the electrochromic element 10200, the electrochromic element 10200 can be discolored to have a desired transmittance, and thus is used to measure the current color changing element 10200 The current state of the configuration can be omitted.

The control module 10100 may control the electrochromic element 10200 to be discolored to have a desired transmittance based on a driving voltage corresponding to the degree of discoloration stored in the storage unit 10140 of the control module 10100 .

1.4 Transmittance according to applied voltage in coloring and decolorizing

FIG. 19 is a graph showing a relationship between a voltage applied to an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application and its transmittance. FIGS. 20 and 21 are diagrams showing the relationship between potential and ions in the coloring process of the electrochromic device according to the embodiment of the present application, and FIGS. 22 and 23 are diagrams showing the relationship according to the embodiment of the present application. Graph of the relationship between potential and ions during decolorization of an electrochromic device.

As shown in FIG. 14 described above, the transmittance of the electrochromic device can be determined by the voltage applied to the electrochromic device during the coloring process. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, the transmittance of the electrochromic device can be determined by the voltage applied to the electrochromic device during the decolorization process.

Referring to FIG. 19 , the change in transmittance due to the voltage applied during the coloring process and the change in transmittance due to the voltage applied during the decolorizing process will be compared and described.

The first state S1 in FIG. 19 refers to a state in which the electrochromic element 10200 has the maximum transmittance, and the second state S2 refers to a state in which the electrochromic element 10200 has a transmittance lower than that in the first state S1 state, the third state S3 refers to the state in which the electrochromic element 10200 has the minimum transmittance, and the fourth state S4 refers to the state in which the electrochromic element 10200 has the transmittance in the second state S2 and the transmittance in the third state S3 The state of transmittance between transmittances. The voltage V refers to a potential difference due to the voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 . Here, the potential difference may be defined as the voltage value of the second electrode 10250 with respect to the first electrode 10210 .

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the electrochromic device in the first state S1.

The control module 10100 does not apply voltage to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 . The first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 have no internal potential.

The ions 10260 may be located in the ion storage layer 10240. The electrochromic element 10200 may be in the first state S1 by the ions 10260 located in the ion storage layer 10240.

Due to the ions 10260, the ion storage layer 10240 may have a relatively high internal potential. The ion storage layer 10240 may have a higher internal potential than the electrochromic layer 10220 due to the ions 10260 . The second internal potential Vb of the ion storage layer 10240 may have a larger value than the third internal potential Vc of the electrochromic layer 10220 .

FIG. 21 shows the internal potential and the position of the ions 10260 in a state where the migration of the ions 10260 is completed due to the voltage applied from the control module 10100 .

As shown in FIG. 21 , the control module 10100 may apply the fifth voltage V5 to the electrochromic element 10200 . The electrochromic element 10200 may apply the fifth voltage V5 to the second electrode 10250 . The electrochromic element 10200 may apply a voltage such that the difference between the voltages applied to the second electrode 10250 and the first electrode 10210 is the fifth voltage V5. The electrochromic element 10200 may apply a voltage such that the potential difference between the second electrode 10250 and the first electrode 10210 is the fifth voltage V5.

Due to the fifth voltage V5 applied through the control module 10100, the first internal potential Va rises to the fifth voltage V5. As the first internal potential Va rises, the second internal potential Vb also rises and has a level corresponding to the first internal potential Va.

The ions 10260 may migrate to the electrochromic layer 10220 due to the potential difference between the second internal potential Vb and the third internal potential Vc. The electrochromic layer 10220 may be reduced and colored due to the gain of ions, and the ion storage layer 10240 may be oxidized and colored due to the loss of ions 10260 . Since the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 are colored, the electrochromic element 10200 can be colored. Here, the electrochromic element 10200 may be in the second state S2. The electrochromic element 10200 can reach a second state S2 in which the electrochromic element 10200 has a lower transmittance than that of the first state S1 due to coloration.

As the ions 10260 are obtained, the third internal potential Vc of the electrochromic layer 10220 may rise. The third internal potential Vc may rise until the third internal potential Vc differs from the second internal potential Vb by a certain level, and when the migration of the ions 10260 is completed, the third internal potential Vc may reach a first threshold value lower than the second internal potential Vb level of the voltage Vth1. That is, the difference between the second internal potential Vb and the third internal potential Vc may be the first threshold voltage Vth1.

Here, the third internal potential Vc may be proportional to the number of ions 10260 located in the electrochromic layer 10220. The amount of ions 10260 located in the electrochromic layer 10220 is related to the degree of discoloration of the electrochromic layer 10220. That is, when the number of ions present in the electrochromic layer 10220 is large, the coloring degree of the electrochromic layer 10220 is high, and when the number of ions present in the electrochromic layer 10220 is small, the coloring degree of the electrochromic layer 10220 Low. Since the degree of discoloration of the electrochromic layer 10220 is related to the degree of discoloration of the electrochromic element 10200, the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 may be proportional to the third internal potential Vc.

The degree of discoloration of the electrochromic element 10200 can be determined according to the ratio between the ions 10260 located in the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ions located in the ion storage layer 10240.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the electrochromic device in a third state S3.

The control module 10100 does not apply voltage to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 . The first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 have no internal potential.

The ions 10260 may be located in the electrochromic layer 10220. The electrochromic element 10200 may be in the third state S3 by the ions 10240 located in the electrochromic layer 10220.

Due to the ions 10260, the electrochromic layer 10220 may have a relatively high internal potential. The electrochromic layer 10220 may have a higher internal potential than the ion storage layer 10240 due to the ions 10260 . The third internal potential Vc of the electrochromic layer 10220 may have a larger value than the second internal potential Vb of the ion storage layer 10240 . Here, the third internal potential Vc is shown to be higher than the second internal potential Vb in FIGS. 20 and 21 . This is for the convenience of description and does not indicate the actual potential value.

FIG. 23 shows the internal potential and the position of the ions 10260 in a state where the migration of the ions 10260 is completed due to the voltage applied from the control module 10100 .

Referring to FIG. 23 , the control module 10100 may apply the fifth voltage V5 to the electrochromic element 10200 . The fifth voltage V5 is the same voltage as the voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 in FIG. 21 . The electrochromic element 10200 may apply the fifth voltage V5 to the second electrode 10250 . The electrochromic element 10200 may apply a voltage such that the difference between the voltages applied to the second electrode 10250 and the first electrode 10210 is the fifth voltage V5. The electrochromic element 10200 may apply a voltage such that the potential difference between the second electrode 10250 and the first electrode 10210 is the fifth voltage V5.

Due to the fifth voltage V5 applied by the control module 10100, the first internal potential Va rises to the fifth voltage V5. Due to the rise of the first internal potential Va, the second internal potential Vb also rises and has a level corresponding to the first internal potential Va.

The ions 10260 may migrate to the ion storage layer 10240 due to the potential difference between the third internal potential Vc and the second internal potential Vb. The electrochromic layer 10220 may be oxidized and decolorized by losing ions, and the ion storage layer 10240 may be reduced and decolorized by gaining ions 10260 . Since the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10260 are decolorized, the electrochromic element 10200 may also be decolorized. Here, the electrochromic element 10200 may be in the fourth state S4. The electrochromic element 10200 can reach a fourth state S4 in which the electrochromic element 10200 has a higher transmittance than that of the third state S3 due to discoloration. The fourth state S4 may be a state in which the transmittance is higher than that of the third state S3.

Due to the loss of the ions 10260, the third internal potential Vc of the electrochromic layer 10220 may drop. The third internal potential Vc may drop until the third internal potential Vc differs from the second internal potential Vb by a certain level, and when the ion 10260 migration is completed, the third internal potential Vc may reach a second threshold voltage higher than the second internal potential Vb Vth2 level. That is, the difference between the third internal potential Vc and the second internal potential Vb may be the second threshold voltage Vth2.

Here, the third internal potential Vc may be proportional to the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 .

When comparing 1) Figures 20 and 21 with 2) Figures 22 and 23, the initial state is different and the applied voltage is the same in 1) Figures 20 and 21 and 2) Figures 22 and 23. FIGS. 20 and 21 show a state in which the fifth voltage V5 is applied for coloring, and FIGS. 22 and 23 show a state in which the fifth voltage V5 is applied for decolorization. The states in FIGS. 20 and 21 are states with the maximum transmittance, and FIGS. 22 to 23 are states with the minimum transmittance.

The magnitude of the third internal potential Vc after the migration of the ions 10260 is completed in FIG. 21 and the magnitude of the third internal potential Vc after the migration of the ions 10260 is completed in FIG. 23 may be different. The magnitude of the third internal potential Vc in FIG. 21 may be smaller than the magnitude of the third internal potential Vc in FIG. 23 .

In FIG. 21, the magnitude of the third internal potential Vc may be smaller than the fifth voltage V5. The magnitude of the third internal potential Vc may be smaller than the fifth voltage V5 by the first threshold voltage Vth1.

In FIG. 23, the magnitude of the third internal potential Vc may be greater than the fifth voltage V5. The magnitude of the third internal potential Vc may be greater than the fifth voltage V5 by the second threshold voltage Vth2.

Therefore, the transmittance in the second state S2 which is the optical state in FIG. 21 may be higher than the transmittance in the fourth state S4 which is the optical state in FIG. 23 . In other words, when a specific voltage is applied to the electrochromic device during coloration and to the electrochromic device during decolorization, the optical state of the electrochromic device can change. Transmission of an electrochromic device when a specific voltage is applied to the electrochromic device during coloring and a voltage equal to the specific voltage applied to the electrochromic device during coloring is applied to the electrochromic device during decolorization rate can be changed. That is, the transmittance when the electrochromic device receives a specific voltage during coloring may be greater than the transmittance when the electrochromic device receives a specific voltage during decolorization.

Although the case where the transmittance when the electrochromic device receives a specific voltage during the coloring process is greater than the transmittance when the electrochromic device receives a specific voltage during the decolorizing process is described as an example with reference to the drawings, on the contrary, when the electrochromic device receives a specific voltage during the decolorization process The transmittance when the electrochromic device receives a specific voltage during coloring may be less than when the electrochromic device receives a specific voltage during decolorization.

This phenomenon may be a result of the above-mentioned ion migration and threshold voltage, or may be a result of the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 having different threshold voltages.

In addition, the control module 10100 may vary the driving voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 according to whether the electrochromic element 10200 is in a coloring process or a decolorizing process. The control module 10100 may determine a color change process of the electrochromic element 10200 and apply a driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 based on the determined color change process.

In this case, the driving voltage of each color changing process may be stored in the storage unit 10140 of the control module 10100 . That is, the driving voltage corresponding to the degree of discoloration of the electrochromic element 10200 in the coloring process and the driving voltage corresponding to the degree of discoloration of the electrochromic element 10200 in the decolorizing process may be stored in the storage unit 10140 .

The control module 10100 may determine the color change process based on the previously applied voltage. In this case, the control module 10100 may record the output driving voltage in the storage unit 10140, load the previous driving voltage stored in the storage unit 10140, and compare the current driving voltage with the previous driving voltage to determine the color changing process. The control module 10100 may calculate the previous state by the previous driving voltage stored in the storage unit 10140, compare the calculated previous state with the target state to determine the color changing process, and provide driving power based on the determined color changing process.

For example, the control module 10100 may apply the sixth voltage V6 to the electrochromic element 10200 during the decolorization process to achieve a state equivalent to the second state S2 of FIG. 21 , which is the coloring process. The sixth voltage V6 may be a lower voltage than the fifth voltage V5. Since the third internal potential Vc of FIG. 23 should be lowered to have the same internal potential as the third internal potential Vc of FIG. 21 , when a voltage lower than the fifth voltage V5 is applied to the electrochromic element 10200, the decolorization process can be The second state S2 is realized in .

On the contrary, although not shown, the control module 10100 may apply a voltage higher than the fifth voltage V5 to the electrochromic element 10200 during the coloring process to achieve a state equal to the fourth state S4 of FIG. 23 , which is the color removal process. Since the third internal potential Vc of FIG. 21 has to be increased to have the same internal potential as the third internal potential Vc of FIG. 23 , when a voltage higher than the fifth voltage V5 is applied to the electrochromic element 10200, it is possible to color A fourth state S4 is achieved in the process.

1.5 Unchangeable parts of the dyeing and destaining process

24 is a graph showing a relationship between a voltage applied to an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application and its transmittance, and FIGS. 25 to 27 are graphs showing an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application Graph of the relationship between potential and ions during decolorization and coloration.

In FIG. 24 , the third state S3 refers to a state in which the electrochromic element 10200 has the minimum transmittance, and the fifth state S5 refers to a state in which the electrochromic element 10200 has a transmittance higher than that of the third state S3 state. The voltage V refers to a potential difference due to the voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 . Here, the potential difference may be defined as the voltage value of the second electrode 10250 with respect to the first electrode 10210 .

FIG. 24 includes a first part P1, a second part P2 and a third part P3. The first portion P1 may be a decolorized portion, the second portion P2 may be a non-variable portion, and the third portion P3 may be a colored portion.

The first portion P1 may be the portion where the state of the electrochromic element 10200 changes from the third state S3 to the fifth state S5, the second portion P2 may be the portion where the state of the electrochromic element 10200 remains the fifth state S5, And the third portion P3 may be a portion where the state of the electrochromic element 10200 becomes the fifth state S5.

FIG. 25 is a graph showing the relationship between the potential and the ions in the first part P1.

Referring to Figures 24 and 25, the electrochromic element 10200 may be discolored from the third state S3 to the fifth state S5. The electrochromic element 10200 can discolor from the third state S3 to the fifth state S5.

In the third state S3, the ions 10260 may be located in the electrochromic layer 10220. Here, when the voltage V having a gradually decreasing level is applied to the second electrode 10250, the second internal potential Vb may decrease, and the ions 10260 in the electrochromic layer 10220 may migrate to the ion storage layer via the electrolyte layer 10230 10240. During this process, the electrochromic layer 10220 may be oxidized and discolored due to the loss of ions 10260 , and the ion storage layer 10240 may be reduced and discolored due to the gain of ions 10260 . The third internal potential Vc gradually decreases through the migration of the ions 10260 in the electrochromic layer 10220 to the ion storage layer 10240.

When the voltage drop stops in a state where the voltage applied to the second electrode 10250 reaches the seventh voltage V7, the drop of the third internal potential Vc also stops after the third internal potential Vc drops to a certain level. Here, the voltage difference between the third internal potential Vc and the seventh voltage V7 may be the second threshold voltage Vth2. That is, in a state where the third internal potential Vc has a voltage higher than the seventh voltage V7 by the second threshold voltage Vth2, the drop of the third internal potential Vc is stopped.

FIG. 26 is a graph showing the relationship between the potential and the ions in the second part P2.

Referring to FIGS. 26 and 24, the state of the electrochromic element 10200 may remain in the fifth state S5. The second portion P2 may be a portion in which the transmittance of the electrochromic element 10200 is maintained even when the voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 rises.

In general, when the applied voltage increases, the transmittance decreases due to coloration. However, when the previous part is the discolored part, the transmittance does not change even if the voltage is increased within a predetermined range. The part where the transmittance does not change with the voltage change can be defined as the non-variable part.

In the case where the previous part is a decolorizing part, a non-variable part can be expressed when the voltage is increased for coloring, and in the case where the previous part is a coloring part, when the voltage is lowered for decolorizing, it can also be expressed that the non-variable part can be expressed variable part.

The voltage V applied to the electrochromic element 10200 to which the seventh voltage V7 is applied by the first part P1 may gradually increase. Even when the voltage V increases, the ions 10260 do not migrate. Even when the voltage V increases in the non-variable voltage portion Vd, the ions 10260 do not migrate.

The non-variable voltage portion Vd may be a voltage portion having variations of the first threshold voltage Vth1 and the second threshold voltage Vth2 with respect to the third internal potential Vc. The lower limit of the non-variable voltage portion Vd may be a value lower than the third internal potential Vc by the second threshold voltage Vth2, and the upper limit of the non-variable voltage portion Vd may be a value higher than the third internal potential Vc by the first threshold voltage Vth1 .

When a voltage lower than the third internal potential Vc in the non-variable voltage portion is applied to the electrochromic element 10200, the difference between the voltage V and the third internal potential Vc is smaller than the second threshold voltage Vth2, and the ions 10260 cannot be electrically The photochromic layer 10220 is released. Therefore, since migration of the ions 10260 does not occur, the third internal potential Vc does not change, and the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 do not change color. In this manner, the state of the electrochromic element 10200 is maintained.

When a voltage higher than the third internal potential Vc in the non-variable voltage portion is applied to the electrochromic element 10200, the difference between the voltage V and the third internal potential Vc is smaller than the first threshold voltage Vth1, and the ions 10260 cannot be electrically The photochromic layer 10220 is released. Therefore, since migration of the ions 10260 does not occur, the third internal potential Vc does not change, and the electrochromic layer 10220 and the ion storage layer 10240 do not change color. In this manner, the state of the electrochromic element 10200 is maintained.

The non-variable voltage portion Vd may correspond to the sum of the magnitudes of the first threshold voltage Vth1 and the second threshold voltage Vth2. Therefore, when the binding force of the electrochromic layer 10220 or the ion storage layer 10240 and the ions 10260 is large, the non-variable voltage part Vd can be increased, and when the binding force of the electrochromic layer 10220 or the ion storage layer 10240 and the ions 10260 small, the non-variable voltage portion Vd can be reduced.

FIG. 27 is a graph showing the relationship between the potential and the ions in the third part P3.

Referring to Figures 27 and 24, the electrochromic element 10200 may change color from the fifth state S5 to the third state S3. The electrochromic element 10200 can be colored from the fifth state S5 to the third state S3.

In the third state S3, some ions of the plurality of ions 10260 may be located in the ion storage layer 10240. Here, when a voltage V higher than the eighth voltage V8 is applied to the electrochromic element 10200, the second internal potential Vb may increase, and the ions 10260 in the ion storage layer 10240 may migrate to the electrochromic layer via the electrolyte layer 10230 10220.

The eighth voltage V8 may be a voltage higher than the third internal potential Vc of the second part P2 by the first threshold voltage Vth1. In the third part P3, since a voltage higher than the eighth voltage V8 is applied to the second electrode 10250, the difference between the second internal potential Vb and the third internal potential Vc becomes higher than the first threshold voltage Vth1, And the ions 10260 in the ion storage layer 10240 can migrate to the electrochromic layer 10220.

During this process, the electrochromic layer 10220 may be reduced and colored due to the gain of ions 10260 , and the ion storage layer 10240 may be oxidized and colored due to the loss of ions 10260 . Through the migration of ions 10260 in the ion storage layer 10240 to the electrochromic layer 10220, the third internal potential Vc gradually increases.

The control module 10100 may generate driving power based on the non-variable portion and apply the generated driving power to the electrochromic element 10200 . When changing between coloration and decolorization of the electrochromic element 10200, the control module 10100 may provide driving power to the electrochromic element 10200 based on the non-variable portion.

The control module 10100 can determine the previous process of the electrochromic element 10200 and apply different driving voltages to the electrochromic element 10200 . When the previous process is a decolorization process, the control module 10100 may control the electrochromic element 10200 by not applying a voltage in the non-variable portion to the electrochromic element 10200 and applying a higher voltage in the non-variable portion to the electrochromic element 10200 The electrochromic element 10200 is colored. When the previous process is a coloring process, the control module 10100 may control the electrochromic element 10200 by not applying a voltage in the non-variable portion to the electrochromic element 10200 and applying a lower voltage in the non-variable portion to the electrochromic element 10200 The electrochromic element 10200 is decolorized.

1.6 Threshold Voltage

28 is an equivalent circuit diagram of an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 28 , an electrochromic element 10200 of an electrochromic device according to an embodiment may be connected to a control module 10100 .

Electrochromic element 10200 may include a plurality of divided regions. The electrochromic element 10200 may include first to n-th divided regions 10270a to 10270n. The divided regions may be connected in parallel with each other.

The divided area may be a partial area of the electrochromic element 10200 connected to the control module 10100 .

The divided areas may be electrical areas rather than areas that may be physically divided. The electrochromic element 10200 includes a first electrode 10210, an electrochromic layer 10220, an electrolyte layer 10230, an ion storage layer 10240, and a second electrode 10250, and each layer constituting the electrochromic element 10200 may be formed of a single layer. Therefore, there may be no areas actually divided into divided areas, and the divided areas may be virtual divided areas for electrical interpretation of the electrochromic element 10200 .

All of the first to n-th divided regions 10270a to 10270n can be interpreted as the same equivalent circuit. The nth divided area 10270n will be described as an example. The nth divided region 10270n may include a first resistor R1, a second resistor R2, a connection resistor Ra, and a capacitor C. The nth divided region 10270n can be interpreted as including a first resistance R1, a second resistance R2, a connection resistance Ra, and a capacitance C.

One end of the first resistor R1 and one end of the second resistor R2 may be electrically connected to adjacent divided regions, and the other end of the first resistor R1 and the other end of the second resistor R2 may be electrically connected to the connecting resistor Ra and the capacitor C. That is, both ends of the connection resistor Ra can be electrically connected to the other end of the first resistor R1 and the other end of the second resistor R2, and both ends of the capacitor C can be electrically connected to the other end of the first resistor R1 and the second resistor R2. the other end of resistor R2.

Here, the horizontal direction may be the x direction or the y direction in FIG. 3 . The horizontal direction may be a direction along which the second electrode 10250 moves away from the contact area between the control module 10100 and the electrochromic element 10200 . The vertical direction may be the z direction in FIG. 3 . The vertical direction may be a direction from the first electrode 10210 toward the second electrode 10250 .

The first resistance R1 may be a resistance of a partial region of the second electrode 10250 in the horizontal direction. The second resistance R2 may be a resistance of a partial region of the first electrode 10210 in the horizontal direction.

The connection resistance Ra may be the resistance in the vertical direction of the electrochromic element 10200 . That is, the connection resistance Ra may be the resistance between the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250 . The connection resistance Ra may be the sum of the following vertical resistances: the resistances of the first electrode 10210, the electrochromic layer 10220, the electrolyte layer 10230, the ion storage layer 10240 and the second electrode 10250, between the first electrode 10210 and the electrochromic layer 10220 , the contact resistance between the electrochromic layer 10220 and the electrolyte layer 10230 , the contact resistance between the electrolyte layer 10230 and the ion storage layer 10240 , and the contact resistance between the ion storage layer 10240 and the second electrode 10250 .

The capacitance C may be the capacitance generated by the first electrode 10210 , the second electrode 10250 , the electrochromic layer 10220 , the electrolyte layer 10230 and the ion storage layer 10240 . The sum of the capacitances of the capacitances C in the plurality of divided regions may be the capacitance of the electrochromic element 10200 .

Due to the RC delay, the voltage charged in the capacitor C can rise over time and reach a predetermined voltage. The predetermined voltage may be a voltage divided by the first resistor R1 , the second resistor R2 and the connection resistor Ra connected in series. That is, the predetermined voltage may be a voltage that is Ra/(R1+R2+Ra) times the voltage applied to the n-th divided region 10270n due to the voltage dividing rule. Since the first resistance R1 and the second resistance R2 are the resistances of the conductors, and the connection resistance Ra is the resistance of the combination of the conductor and the nonconductor, the connection resistance Ra has a much larger value than the first resistance R1 and the second resistance R2, After a period of time due to the RC delay, the voltage charged in the capacitor C may correspond to the voltage applied to the nth divided region 10270n. That is, after a period of time due to the RC delay, the voltage charged in the capacitor C may become similar to the voltage applied to the nth divided region 10270n. Dramatically, after a period of time due to the RC delay, the voltage charged in the capacitor C may become equal to the voltage applied to the nth divided region 10270n.

The voltage charged in the capacitor C may be equal to the input voltage of the adjacent divided regions. That is, the voltage charged in the capacitor C can be applied to the adjacent divided regions. For example, the voltage charged in the capacitor C of the first divided area 10270a may be applied to the second divided area 10270b. The voltage charged in the capacitor C of the first divided region 10270a may be applied to one end of the first resistance R1 and one end of the second resistance R2 of the second divided region 10270b.

Since the voltages charged in the capacitors C in the divided regions are proportional to the input voltage, the voltages charged in the capacitors C in the plurality of divided regions can be sequentially charged through the RC delay.

The voltages of the capacitors C in the plurality of divided regions may sequentially rise. Among the capacitances C of the plurality of divided areas, the capacitance C in the divided area close to the control module 10100 may be charged first, and the capacitance C in the divided area away from the control module 10100 may be charged later. Among the capacitances C of the plurality of divided areas, the capacitance C in the divided area adjacent to the contact area between the control module 10100 and the electrochromic element 10200 may be charged first, and may be charged later on spaced from the contact area The capacitor C in the divided area is charged.

The capacitance C in the first divided region 10270a among the plurality of divided regions may be charged first, and the plurality of capacitances C up to the capacitance C in the n-th divided region 10270n may be sequentially charged.

Since the voltage charged in the capacitor C is the driving voltage applied to the first electrode 10210 and the second electrode 10250, the degree of discoloration can be determined by the voltage charged in the capacitor C.

29 to 31 are graphs showing the degree of electrochromism over time of electrochromic elements according to embodiments of the present application.

As shown in FIG. 29, when a voltage is applied from the control module 10100 to the electrochromic element 10200, in the initial stage, the area adjacent to the contact area between the control module 10100 and the electrochromic element 10200 is discolored first, and away from the contact The area of the area does not discolor. That is, the degree of discoloration may be different between areas adjacent to the contact area and areas spaced from the contact area. In other words, the transmittance of the region adjacent to the contact region and the transmittance of the region spaced from the contact region may be different. The transmittance of the area adjacent to the contact area may be less than the transmittance of the area spaced from the contact area during the coloring process.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the intermediate stage of the continuous application of voltage from the control module 10100 to the electrochromic element 10200, the discoloration of the area adjacent to the contact area can be completed and the discoloration of the area spaced from the contact area can be started . Even in this case, the degree of discoloration may be different between areas adjacent to the contact area and areas spaced from the contact area. Even when the degree of discoloration of the area adjacent to the contact area reaches the target degree of discoloration, the degree of discoloration of the area spaced from the contact area may not reach the target degree of discoloration. In other words, the transmittance of the region adjacent to the contact region and the transmittance of the region spaced from the contact region may be different. During tinting, the transmittance of regions adjacent to the contact region may be less than the transmittance of regions spaced from the contact region. In the intermediate stage, the area of the region where the degree of discoloration reaches the target degree of discoloration gradually widens with time. The area of the area where the degree of discoloration reaches the target degree of discoloration may widen over time in a direction away from the contact area.

As shown in FIG. 31 , when the completion stage is reached after the voltage is continuously applied from the control module 10100 to the electrochromic element 10200 , the discoloration of the entire area of the electrochromic element 10200 is completed. A period from a time point when a voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 to a time point when the discoloration of the entire area of the electrochromic element 10200 is completed may be defined as a threshold period.

When the threshold period is reached, the coloring state of the entire area of the electrochromic element 10200 may be uniform. When the threshold period is reached, the change between the colored states at the first and second points of the electrochromic element 10200 may be at a predetermined level or lower. When the threshold period is reached, the transmittances at the first point and the second point of the electrochromic element 10200 may correspond to each other. The maximum change between the colored states at the first and second points of the electrochromic element 10200 may be a predetermined level or less. When the threshold period is reached, the change between the transmittances of the first and second points of the electrochromic element 10200 may be in the range of 0% to 30%.

The threshold period may be proportional to the area of the electrochromic element 10200 . That is, the threshold period may be longer as the area of the electrochromic element 10200 is larger. In other words, as the area of the electrochromic element 10200 becomes larger, the period during which the electrochromic element 10200 is uniformly discolored may be longer. The change in the coloring state of the different regions of the electrochromic element 10200 can also be proportional to the area of the electrochromic element 10200 . The maximum change in color state of the different regions of the electrochromic element 10200 may increase as the area of the electrochromic element 10200 increases.

As shown in FIG. 32, the threshold period may be proportional to the voltage difference.

The voltage difference may be the difference between the voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 from the control module 10100 and the voltage charged in the electrochromic element 10200 .

The voltage difference may be proportional to the difference between the current discoloration state and the target discoloration state. Because the voltage charged in the electrochromic element 10200 corresponds to the current discoloration state of the electrochromic element 10200, and the voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 corresponds to the target discoloration state, the voltage difference can be related to the current discoloration state and The difference between the target discoloration states is proportional.

33 is a graph illustrating voltages applied from a control module to an electrochromic element according to an embodiment of the present application.

The voltage applied from the control module 10100 to the electrochromic element 10200 in the application phase will be described with reference to FIG. 33 .

The control module 10100 may provide a driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 . The period during which the driving voltage provided from the control module 10100 to the electrochromic element 10200 is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 may be determined based on the threshold period. The period tb during which the driving voltage is applied from the control module 10100 to the electrochromic element 10200 may be longer than the threshold period ta.

The control module 10100 may set the period tb during which the driving voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 to be fixed according to the threshold period ta, and supply the driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 . Alternatively, the control module 10100 may change the period tb during which the driving voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 according to the threshold period ta.

When the control module 10100 applies the drive voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 during the fixed time period tb for applying the drive voltage to the electrochromic element 10200, the control module 10100 can calculate the maximum threshold period of the electrochromic element 10200, and The driving voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 for a period longer than the maximum threshold period. The maximum threshold period may be the threshold period required when the electrochromic element 10200 is discolored from a decolorized state to a maximum colored state. The control module 10100 can apply the driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 for a period longer than the maximum threshold period, regardless of which state the electrochromic element 10200 will change to, and can omit the application of the driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 for the period of time. calculate. In this way, there is an effect of reducing the number of operations.

The threshold period ta may be related to the area of the electrochromic element 10200 . The threshold period ta may be proportional to the area of the electrochromic element 10200 . Because the maximum threshold period is also related to the area of the electrochromic element 10200 , the control module 10100 can set the period tb for applying the driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 according to the area of the electrochromic element 10200 and apply the driving voltage to the electrical Chromic element 10200.

When the control module 10100 changes the period tb for applying the driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 according to the threshold period ta, the control module 10100 may measure the current potential of the electrochromic element 10200 and apply the driving voltage by changing the current potential based on the measurement The driving voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 for the period tb to the electrochromic element 10200 . In this case, although not shown, the control module 10100 may further include a measurement unit capable of measuring the current potential of the electrochromic element 10200 .

Alternatively, the control module 10100 may change the period tb during which the driving voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 based on pre-stored threshold period data. The threshold period data may be stored in the storage unit 10140 of the control module 10100 , and the control module 10100 may change the period tb during which the driving voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 based on the threshold period data stored in the storage unit 10140 . The threshold period data may also be related to the area of the electrochromic element 10200 .

The threshold period data may be data related to voltage difference and/or temperature. Because the threshold period is determined by the voltage difference, the control module 10100 can compare the voltage previously applied to the electrochromic element 10200 and the voltage currently applied to the electrochromic element 10200, calculate the voltage difference between them, and calculate the voltage difference between The driving voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 during the period of the threshold period ta corresponding to the voltage difference. Because the threshold period is related to ion migration, the threshold period data may be temperature related data. The control module 10100 can measure the temperature in real time and change the threshold period data stored in the storage unit 10140 in real time.

The threshold period data may include data in the apply phase and data in the sustain phase.

The threshold period data in the application phase may be voltage difference and/or temperature related data. The threshold period data in the sustain phase may be data related to voltage difference, temperature, and/or the period of the sustain phase where no voltage is applied.

34 and 35 are diagrams illustrating threshold periods of voltage differences according to an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a threshold period due to a voltage difference that varies according to a target discoloration degree in a decolorized state.

In FIG. 34, the first drive voltage V21 is the drive voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 when the state of the electrochromic element 10200 changes from the decolorized state to the first colored state, and the second drive voltage V22 indicates when the electrochromic element 10200 is The driving voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 when the state of the element 10200 changes from the discolored state to the second colored state.

The first coloring state may refer to a state in which the degree of coloring is higher than that of the second coloring state. The first colored state may refer to a state in which the transmittance is lower than that of the second colored state. The first driving voltage V21 may be a voltage higher than the second driving voltage V22.

Since no driving voltage is applied from the control module 10100 to the electrochromic element 10200 in the decolorized state, when the state of the electrochromic element 10200 changes from the decolorized state to the first colored state, the voltage difference may be equal to the first driving voltage V21, And when the state of the electrochromic element 10200 changes from the decolorized state to the second colored state, the voltage difference may be equal to the second driving voltage V22. Because the voltage difference when the state of the electrochromic element 10200 becomes the first colored state is smaller than the voltage difference when the state of the electrochromic element 10200 becomes the second colored state, when the state of the electrochromic element 10200 becomes The second threshold period t22 when the second colored state is shorter than the first threshold period t21 when the state of the electrochromic element 10200 is changed to the first colored state. That is, the time period required for the electrochromic element 10200 to be uniformly colored to the second colored state may be shorter than the time period required for the electrochromic element 10200 to be uniformly colored to the first colored state.

The first threshold period t21 when the state of the electrochromic element 10200 becomes the first colored state and the second threshold period t22 when the state of the electrochromic element 10200 becomes the second colored state may be stored in the control module 10100 In the storage unit 10140, and the control module 10100 may determine the period for applying the driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 based on the first threshold period t21 and the second threshold period t22 stored in the storage unit 10140, and the driving voltage Electrochromic element 10200 is applied.

When changing the state of the electrochromic element 10200 from the decolorized state to the first colored state, the control module 10100 may cause the electrochromic element 10200 to cause the electrochromic The color-changing element 10200 is colored. In addition, when changing the state of the electrochromic element 10200 from the decolorized state to the second colored state, the control module 10100 may cause the electrical The chromic element 10200 is colored.

35 is a graph showing a threshold period due to a voltage difference when the state of the electrochromic element 10200 is changed from a colored state to another discoloration level.

As shown in FIG. 35 , the first driving voltage V31 is the driving voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 when the state of the electrochromic element 10200 changes from the first coloring state to the third coloring state, and the second driving voltage V32 represents when The driving voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 when the state of the electrochromic element 10200 changes from the second colored state to the third colored state.

The first coloring state may refer to a state in which the degree of coloring is higher than that of the second coloring state. The first colored state may refer to a state in which the transmittance is lower than that of the second colored state. The first driving voltage V31 may be a voltage higher than the second driving voltage V32, and the third driving voltage V33 may be a voltage higher than the first driving voltage V31.

When the initial state of the electrochromic element 10200 is the first colored state, the first driving voltage V31 is charged in the electrochromic element 10200 . That is, the case where the initial state of the electrochromic element 10200 is the first colored state may be the same as the case where the first driving voltage V31 is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 .

When the initial state of the electrochromic element 10200 is the second colored state, the second driving voltage V32 is charged in the electrochromic element 10200 . That is, the case where the initial state of the electrochromic element 10200 is the second colored state may be the same as the case where the second driving voltage V32 is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 .

The voltage difference may be the first voltage difference Vd1 when the state of the electrochromic element 10200 changes from the first colored state to the third colored state. The driving voltage in the first colored state of the electrochromic element 10200 may be the first driving voltage V31, the driving voltage in the third colored state of the electrochromic element 10200 may be the third driving voltage V33, and the third driving voltage V33 The difference from the first driving voltage V31 may be the first voltage difference Vd1.

When the state of the electrochromic element 10200 changes from the second colored state to the third colored state, the voltage difference may be the second voltage difference Vd2. The driving voltage in the second colored state of the electrochromic element 10200 may be the second driving voltage V32, the driving voltage in the third colored state of the electrochromic element 10200 may be the third driving voltage V33, and the third driving voltage V33 and the second driving voltage V32 may be the second voltage difference Vd2.

Because the first voltage difference Vd1 is smaller than the second voltage difference Vd2, the first threshold period t31 when the state of the electrochromic element 10200 changes from the first coloring state to the third coloring state may be shorter than when the electrochromic element 10200 has a The second threshold period t32 when the state changes from the second colored state to the third colored state.

The previous state is stored in the storage unit 10140 of the control module 10100 . That is, the driving voltage previously output to the electrochromic element 10200 may be stored in the storage unit 10140 of the control module 10100 . The control module 10100 may store the driving voltage in the storage unit 10140 each time the driving voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 . The first shaded state and the second shaded state are stored in the storage unit 10140 of the control module 10100 .

The threshold period according to the voltage difference is stored in the storage unit 10140 of the control module 10100 . When the state of the electrochromic element 10200 is changed from the first colored state to the third colored state, the control module 10100 may compare the third driving voltage V33 , which is a target voltage applied to the electrochromic element 10200 , with the third driving voltage V33 stored in the storage unit 10140 the first driving voltage V31, and calculate the first voltage difference Vd1. The control module 10100 may determine a period for applying the driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 based on the first threshold period t31 corresponding to the first voltage difference Vd1 and apply the driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 . Here, the period during which the driving voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 may be longer than the first threshold period t31.

When the state of the electrochromic element 10200 is changed from the second colored state to the third colored state, the control module 10100 may compare the third driving voltage V33 as a target value to be applied to the electrochromic element 10200 with the third driving voltage V33 stored in the storage unit 10140 in the driving voltage V32, and calculate the second voltage difference Vd2. The control module 10100 may determine a period for applying the driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 based on the second threshold period t32 corresponding to the second voltage difference Vd2, and apply the driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200. Here, the period during which the driving voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 may be longer than the second threshold period t32.

Although the case where the state of the electrochromic element 10200 is changed from a low coloring state to a high coloring state has been described above with reference to the drawings, the same description can also be applied to the state of the electrochromic element 10200 changing from a high coloring state to a low coloring state status situation. That is, the above description can also be applied to the decolorization process. During decolorization of the electrochromic element 10200, the threshold period may also be changed due to the voltage difference.

Furthermore, although the application phase is shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 and described in detail above with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35 by way of example, features corresponding to the application phase may also be applied to the maintenance phase. In the sustain phase, the previous state may be the voltage applied in the application phase or the voltage applied in the previous sustain phase preceding the current sustain phase. The threshold period may be determined based on the previous state and the current state.

1.7 Holding voltage

36 and 37 are graphs illustrating threshold periods by duty cycle of an electrochromic device according to an embodiment of the present application.

The threshold period according to the duty ratio in the sustain phase will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37 .

36 is a diagram showing a threshold period when the non-application period is relatively short, and FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a threshold period when the non-application period is relatively long.

Referring to FIG. 36 , the control module 10100 according to an embodiment may apply a driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 in an application phase and a sustain phase.

The application stage may be a stage in which the electrochromic element 10200 is discolored by the control module 10100 . The application stage may be a stage in which the electrochromic element 10200 is discolored to a target discoloration level by the control module 10100 . The application phase may include an initial discoloration phase and a discoloration level change phase.

The sustain phase refers to a phase in which a sustain voltage is applied to the electrochromic element 10200 to maintain the state of the electrochromic element 10200 . During the sustain phase, the control module 10100 may apply a sustain voltage in the form of pulses to the electrochromic element 10200 to maintain the state of the electrochromic element 10200 .

In the applying phase, the control module 10100 may apply the driving voltage until the first time point t ₄₁ . The control module 10100 may apply a gradually rising driving voltage until a first time point t ₄₁ during a predetermined portion, and apply a predetermined level of the driving voltage. The application phase may be maintained for a first period w1.

The sustain phase may include an application period and a non-application period. The application period may be defined as the period in which the driving voltage is applied, and the non-application period may be defined as the period in which the driving voltage is not applied. The control module 10100 can apply a voltage in the form of pulses to the electrochromic element 10200 through the repeated application and non-application periods in the sustain phase.

A period from a first time point t ₄₁ when the application phase ends to a second time point t ₄₂ when the application period starts may be defined as a second period w2. The second period w2 may be a non-applying period. A period from the second time point _t42 when the non-application period ends to the third time point t43 when the application period ends may be defined as a third period w3.

The application period may be determined by the driving voltage values applied in the application period and the non-application period. The third period w3 may be determined by the driving voltage value and the second period w2.

The third period w3 may be shorter than the first period w1.

The correlation between the driving voltage value in the application stage and the application period will be described. As the driving voltage value in the application phase becomes larger, the state change in the non-application period may increase. That is, as the driving voltage value in the application stage becomes larger, the degree of natural discoloration can be increased. Since the difference between the voltage charged in the electrochromic element 10200 and the driving voltage increases with the value of the driving voltage in the applying phase, the threshold period in the sustaining phase may increase. Since the application period should be longer than the threshold period, the application period may be longer as the driving voltage value becomes larger.

In the case where the state of the electrochromic element 10200 in the application phase changes from the state in which the electrochromic element 10200 has the minimum transmittance to the state in which the electrochromic element 10200 has the maximum transmittance, the threshold value in the sustaining phase in this situation The period may be a maximum threshold period. The control module 10100 may store the maximum threshold period in the storage unit 10140 and apply a driving voltage to the electrochromic element 10200 for the maximum threshold period regardless of the driving voltage value in the application phase to maintain the state of the electrochromic element. In this way, there is an effect of reducing the number of operations of the control module 10100 .

The correlation between the non-application period and the application period will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37 . The application phase in FIG. 37 is the same as the application phase in FIG. 36 .

A period from the first time point _t41 when the application phase ends to the fourth time point t44 when the application period starts may be defined as a fourth period w4. The fourth period w4 may be a non-applying period. A period from the fourth time point t44 when the non-application period ends to the fifth time point t45 when the application period ends may be defined as a fifth period w5.

The non-application period of FIG. 36 is shorter than the non-application period of FIG. 37 . That is, the second period w2 is a shorter period than the fourth period w4.

The state change of the electrochromic element 10200 may increase with longer periods of non-application. That is, the degree of natural discoloration can increase with longer periods of non-application. Since the difference between the current charged voltage and the driving voltage in the electrochromic element 10200 increases as the non-application period is longer, the threshold period in the sustain phase may increase. Since the application period should be longer than the threshold period, the application period can be longer as the non-application period is longer.

That is, since the non-application period of FIG. 36 is shorter than the non-application period of FIG. 37 , by setting the application period of FIG. 36 to be shorter than the application period of FIG. 37 , it is possible to reduce power consumption with uniformly maintaining electrochromic The effect of the degree of discoloration of the element 10200.

In other words, since the second period w2 of FIG. 36 is shorter than the fourth period w4 of FIG. 37 , by setting the third period w3 of FIG. 36 to be shorter than the fifth period w5 of FIG. 37 , power consumption can be reduced, and has The effect of maintaining the degree of discoloration of the electrochromic element 10200 uniformly.

In the sustain phase, since the duty ratio refers to the ratio between the sum of the application period and the non-application period and the application period, the duty ratio can be maintained corresponding to the ratio. However, when the driving voltage value in the application stage is increased, the duty ratio can also be increased to uniformly maintain the degree of discoloration.

The first period w1 may be equal to the third period w3, or the first period w1 may be longer than the third period w3. The first period w1 may be equal to the third period w3 when the second period w2, which is a non-application period, extends infinitely so that natural discoloration occurs and the electrochromic element 10200 returns to its original state. Otherwise, the first period w1 may be longer than the third period w3. In this case, the third period w3 may be set shorter than the first period w1 to reduce power consumption.

Hereinafter, an apparatus for driving an electrochromic element by applying a voltage to the electrochromic element will be described.

2. Electroactive Devices

The apparatus for driving an electrochromic element can drive the electroactive element 22000 as well as the electrochromic element. In the following, the electroactive element 22000 and the device for driving the electroactive device 22000 are defined as the electroactive device 22001 .

The electroactive element 22000 is an element including two electrodes and an intermediate layer disposed between the two electrodes, and is activated or driven by receiving electric power. Electrochromic elements are examples of electroactive elements 22000.

Activation and actuation refer to changes in the state of the electroactive device 22001. The state may include at least one of an electrical state and an optical state.

The electroactive device 22001 may be driven according to a predetermined electrical process.

Electrical processing may include the generation of electrical power, transmission of the generated electrical power, and state changes caused by the transmitted electrical power.

In the following, the electroactive device 22001 will be described in detail.

2.1 Detailed description of electroactive devices

38 is a diagram illustrating elements of an electroactive device according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 38 , an electroactive device 20001 according to an embodiment of the present application may include a power supply unit 20100 and an electroactive module 20200 . The electroactive module 20200 may include a driver module 21000 and an electroactive element 22000 . The electroactive device 20001 may further include other elements not shown in the figures. However, the elements shown in FIG. 38 are not required, and electroactive devices 20001 with more or fewer elements than those shown in FIG. 38 may also be implemented.

The power supply unit 20100 can generate power.

The electroactive module 20200 may be driven by receiving active power from the power supply unit 20100 .

The power supply unit 20100 may generate power for driving the electroactive module 20200 . The power used to drive the electroactive module 20200 may be defined as active power.

Active power may be transferred to the electroactive module 20200 . In order to transmit effective power, a predetermined electrical connector may be arranged between the power supply unit 20100 and the electroactive module 20200 .

Types of the power supply unit 20100 may include: i) a storage power supply unit configured to supply power stored therein to the electroactive module 20200; and ii) a conversion power supply unit configured to receive power from the outside, to receive power Convert the power to the type of power that can be used by the electroactive module 20200, and transmit the converted power to the electroactive module 20200.

Specifically, the power supply unit 20100 may be a vehicle battery, which is a type of storage power supply unit 20100 .

The state of the electroactive module 20200 can be changed by the electroactive module 20200 receiving active power. The electroactive module 20200 may include a driver module 21000 and an electroactive element 22000 .

Hereinafter, the driving module 21000 and the electroactive element 22000 included in the electroactive module 20200 will be described. First, the function of the driving module 21000 will be described.

The driving module 21000 can drive the electro-active element 22000 . The drive module 21000 can change the state of the electroactive element 22000 .

The driving module 21000 may receive active power from the power supply unit 20100 .

The driving module 21000 may generate driving power based on the effective power. The driving power may be defined as the power used to drive the electro-active element 22000 . The state of the electroactive element 22000 can be changed due to the drive power.

FIG. 39 is a view illustrating a driving module 21000 according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 39 , a driving module 21000 according to an embodiment of the present application may include a driving unit 21300 and an electrical connection member 21500 . However, the elements shown in FIG. 39 are not necessary, and a driving module 21000 having more or less elements than those shown in FIG. 39 may also be implemented.

The driving unit 21300 may generate driving power.

The electrical connection member 21500 can transmit driving power to the electroactive element 22000 .

Hereinafter, elements of the driving module 21000 will be described in detail.

First, the driving unit 21300 will be described.

The driving unit 21300 according to an embodiment of the present application may receive effective power, generate driving power, and output driving power. The driving unit 21300 can select various sizes and polarities of power as driving power. For example, the driving power may be 0V.

The driving unit 21300 may be implemented in the form of hardware including predetermined electronic circuits or chips or in the form of software including predetermined programs.

The driving unit 21300 may be implemented on the driving substrate 21310 .

The driving unit 21300 may include elements having predetermined functions.

FIG. 40 is a block diagram illustrating a driving unit 21300 according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 40 , the driving unit 21300 may include an input/adjustment unit 21301 , a generation unit 21303 , an output unit 21305 and a control unit 21307 . However, the elements shown in FIG. 40 are not necessary, and a driving unit 2130 having more or less elements than those shown in FIG. 40 may also be implemented. The elements of the driving unit 21300 may be elements classified according to functions of the driving unit 21300 .

The input/adjustment unit 21301 can receive active power from the power supply unit 20100 .

The input/adjustment unit 21301 can convert effective power into internal power. Internal power may be defined as power that may be used in the driving unit 21300 . Internal power can be used by each element of the drive unit 21300. Internal power may be transmitted to each element of the driving unit 21300. The internal power can be transmitted to the generation unit 21303 , the output unit 21305 and the control unit 21307 . Internal power can be used in the generation unit 21303, the output unit 21305, and the control unit 21307.

The input/adjustment unit 21301 can generate internal power having a smaller value than the effective power. The input/adjustment unit 21301 can reduce the available power. The internal power may have a smaller value than the effective power. In order to reduce the effective power, a predetermined voltage level shifter may be arranged in the input/adjustment unit 21301 .

The input/adjustment unit 21301 can generate more stable internal power than effective power. The input/adjustment unit 21301 can stabilize the effective power. The internal power may be more stable power than the available power. For example, the effective power may be power whose magnitude is variable, and the internal power may be constant power whose magnitude remains constant. In order to stabilize the effective power, a predetermined regulator may be arranged in the input/adjustment unit 21301. Types of regulators may include: i) linear regulators configured to directly regulate received power; and ii) switching regulators configured to generate pulses based on received power and adjust the amount of pulses to output fine adjustments voltage. Specifically, the input/adjustment unit 21301 may receive power output from a vehicle battery, reduce power, and stabilize power. Therefore, the electric power output from the vehicle battery can be converted into electric power that can be used by the drive unit 21300 .

The generating unit 21303 can generate driving power. The generating unit 21303 can receive internal power and generate driving power.

The generating unit 21303 can generate a plurality of driving powers having different characteristics. At least one of the sizes and polarities of the plurality of driving powers may be different.

The generating unit 21303 may transmit the driving power to the output unit 21305.

The output unit 21305 can output driving power. Driving power can be output from the driving unit 21300 via the output unit 21305 .

The output unit 21305 can control the output of driving power. The output unit 21305 of the driving unit 21300 may selectively output a plurality of driving powers received from the generating unit 21303 . The characteristics of the power output from the output unit 21305 may be different from the characteristics of the driving power. Attributes may include at least one of size and polarity. For example, the output unit 21305 may not output driving power.

The output unit 21305 may transmit driving power to the electrical connection member 21500 .

The control unit 21307 can generally control the drive unit 21300. The control unit 21307 can control the input/adjustment unit 21301, the generation unit 21303 and the output unit 21305.

The control unit 21307 can control the generation of internal power.

The control unit 21307 can control the generation of driving power. The control unit 21307 may allow the generation unit 21303 to generate at least one of the plurality of driving powers.

The control unit 21307 can control the output of driving power. The control unit 21307 may allow the output unit 21305 to output power having properties different from the driving power.

The control unit 21307 may generate a control signal for controlling the driving unit 21300 . The control unit 21307 can generate control signals for controlling the input/adjustment unit 21301 , the generation unit 21303 and the output unit 21305 . In terms of hardware, the control unit 21307 may be provided in the form of an electronic circuit, such as a central processing unit (CPU) chip that processes electrical signals to perform control functions. In terms of software, the control unit 21307 may be provided in the form of a program for driving the hardware of the control unit 21307. Specifically, the control unit 21307 may be provided as a microprocessor.

The drive unit 21300 may also include a separate feedback unit.

The feedback unit can prevent malfunction of the electroactive element 22000 . That is, the feedback unit may operate such that the electroactive element 22000 is maintained in a normal state.

The feedback unit may have a predetermined feedback mechanism. The feedback mechanism can measure the current state of the electroactive element 22000 and drive the electrochromic element 22200 based on the current state. For example, the voltage value or current value of the electro-active element 22000 may be returned to the feedback unit. The feedback unit may measure the current state of the electroactive element 22000 based on the voltage value or the current value. The feedback unit may send the current state of the measurement to the control unit 21307. The feedback unit may generate a feedback signal corresponding to the measured current state, and send the feedback signal to the control unit 21307 . The control unit 21307 can change the power output through the output unit 21305 based on the feedback signal. The control unit 21307 can change the power level output through the output unit 21305 based on the feedback signal, and control the electro-active element 22000 to maintain a normal state.

Alternatively, the feedback unit may operate separately from the control unit 21307. A feedback unit may be connected to the electro-active element 22000 and change the power output from the output unit 21305 based on the current state of the electro-active element 22000 so that the electro-active element 22000 remains in a normal state.

When the current state of the electro-active element 22000 is not the normal state, the feedback unit may drive the electro-active element 22000 so that the electro-active element 22000 reaches the normal state. The feedback unit can generally control the drive unit 21300 to generate drive power for allowing the state of the electroactive element 22000 to be a normal state.

The driving unit 21300 included in the driving module 21000 has been described above. Hereinafter, the electrical connection member 21500 included in the driving module 21000 will be described.

The electrical connection member 21500 according to an embodiment of the present application may be electrically connected to the driving unit 21300 and the electroactive element 22000 .

The electrical connection member 21500 may receive driving power from the driving unit 21300 .

The electrical connection member 21500 can transmit driving power to the electroactive element 22000 . The electroactive element 22000 may receive driving power through the electrical connection member 21500 .

The functions of the elements of the drive module 21000 have been described above. In the following, the electroactive element 22000 will be described.

41 is a diagram illustrating an electroactive element 22000 according to an embodiment of the present application.

The state of the electro-active element 22000 according to embodiments of the present application may be changed by receiving the driving power through the electro-active element 22000 . The electroactive element 22000 may receive drive power from the electrical connection member 21500 of the drive module 21000 .

Referring to FIG. 41 , an electroactive element 22000 according to an embodiment of the present application may include electrode layers 22010 and 22050 and an intermediate layer 22030 . However, the layers shown in FIG. 41 are not required, and electroactive elements 22000 may also be implemented with more or fewer layers than those shown in FIG. 41 .

The electrode layer may include a first electrode 22010 and a second electrode 22050.

The first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 may be conductive. The first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 may be formed of a conductive material. The above-described driving power may be applied to the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050.

Drive power may include voltage or current. When a voltage is applied to the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050, the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 may have a predetermined potential. When current is applied to the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050, the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 may have a predetermined potential due to the current.

The intermediate layer 22030 may be disposed between the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050.

The intermediate layer 22030 may be in contact with the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050.

The middle layer 22030 is a state-changeable layer. The intermediate layer 22030 is a layer whose state can be changed based on the driving power formed in the first electrode 22010 and/or the second electrode 22050 .

The electrode layer and the intermediate layer 22030 may be implemented in the form of a flat plate.

The electrode layer and the intermediate layer 22030 may include multiple regions.

The driving module 21000 and the electro-active element 22000 included in the electro-active module 20200 have been described above by focusing on the functional description. Hereinafter, the shapes, positional relationships, and connection relationships of elements included in the electroactive module 20200 will be described.

Throughout the specification, when an element such as a film, region or substrate is referred to as being "disposed on", "connected to" or "contacting" another element, the element can be construed as being directly "disposed on", "connected to" ” or “contacts” the other element, or another element can be construed as being present between the element and the other element. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals. As used herein, the term "and/or" includes any one or all combinations of one or more of the correspondingly listed items.

Relative terms such as "upper", "side", and "lower" may be used to describe the relationship between one element and another element as shown in the figures. Relative terms may be understood to be intended to include different orientations of elements than those depicted in the figures. For example, when elements are turned over in the figures, elements depicted as being present on upper surfaces of other elements are positioned at lower surfaces of the other elements. Thus, the term "upper" given by way of example may depend on the particular orientation in the figures and includes both "lower" and "upper" orientations. Relative descriptions herein may be interpreted accordingly when the element is in the other orientation (rotated 90° with respect to the other orientation).

The outer direction may be the direction corresponding to the direction from the central axis toward the "side surface", and the inner direction may be the direction corresponding to the direction from the "side surface" toward the central axis.

In this specification, although terms such as first and second are used to describe various elements, components, regions, layers and/or sections, it is understood that the elements, components, regions, layers and/or sections Not limited by terminology.

42 is an exploded perspective view illustrating an electroactive module 20200 according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 42, the driving module 21000 may be arranged on the electroactive element 22000 having a specific structure.

Electroactive element 22000 may have trench structure 22100 . The trench structure 22100 may be a structure from which a partial region of the first electrode 22010 and a partial region of the intermediate layer 22030 are removed such that some of the regions of the second electrode 22050 are exposed toward the first electrode 22010 .

Hereinafter, the trench structure 22100 of the electroactive element 22000 will be described in detail.

43 is a diagram illustrating an electroactive element in which trench structures according to embodiments of the present application are formed.

Referring to FIG. 43 , trench structures 22100 may be formed in regions adjacent to side surfaces of the electroactive elements 22000 .

The trench structure 22100 may be formed through the first electrode 22010 and the intermediate layer 22030 of the electroactive element 22000 such that a partial region of the second electrode 22050 is exposed. When the trench structure 22100 is formed, a partial area of the first electrode 22010 and a partial area of the intermediate layer 22030 may be removed.

The trench structure 22100 may be formed along the side surface of the electroactive element 22000 , or the trench structure 22100 may be formed separately from the side surface of the electroactive element 22000 .

As shown in FIG. 43( a ), when the trench structure 22100 is formed along the side surface of the electroactive element 22000 , the trench structure 22100 may be formed such that a portion of the side surface of the electroactive element 22000 is ablated (removed). The trench structure 22100 may be formed such that the area of the side surface of the first electrode 22010 and the area of the side surface of the intermediate layer 22030 are removed. Therefore, a partial cross-section of the first electrode 22010 and a partial cross-section of the intermediate layer 22030 may be exposed in the outer direction.

When the trench structure 22100 is formed along the side surface of the electroactive element 22000 as described above, there is an effect of simplifying the process of forming the trench structure 22100 . When the trench structure 22100 is formed apart from the side surface of the electroactive element 22000, the start and end points of the process should be designed so that the trench structure 22100 is formed from the start point of the trench structure 22100 to the end point. In contrast, when the trench structure 22100 is formed along the side surface of the electroactive element 22000, since the process can be performed by simply setting the starting point of the trench structure 22100, there is an effect of simplifying the process.

Also, when the trench structure 22100 is formed along the side surface of the electroactive element 22000, there is an effect of maximizing the area in which the electroactive element 22000 is utilized. A region of the electroactive element 22000 located in the outer direction from the region where the trench structure 22100 is formed may be a region from which the electroactive element 22000 cannot be driven without the trench structure 22100 from which the side surfaces are removed. In contrast, when the trench structure 22100 is formed such that the side surfaces are ablated, no non-driving region is formed in the electroactive element 22000. Accordingly, a trench structure 22100 formed such that the side surface is ablated may have a larger area to drive the electroactive element 22000 than a trench structure 22100 of the same size that is formed such that the side surface is not ablated . Therefore, when the trench structure 22100 is formed along the side surface of the electroactive element 22000, there is an effect of maximizing the area in which the electroactive element 22000 is utilized.

When the trench structure 22100 is formed to be separated from the side surface of the electroactive element 22000, due to the trench structure 22100, the first electrode 22010 and the intermediate layer 22030 can be removed by being separated from the side surface of the electroactive element 22000 in the inner direction .

When the trench structure 22100 is formed to be separated from the side surface of the electroactive element 22000 as described above, the present application has the effect of allowing the electroactive element 22000 to receive driving power stably. When the trench structure 22100 is formed not to be separated from the side surface in the electro-active element 22000, the driving module 21000 disposed in the trench structure may be separated from the electro-active element 22000 by the open side surface. Conversely, when the trench structure 22100 is formed apart from the side surface of the electroactive element 22000, the driving module 21000 can be supported by an area of the electroactive element 22000 that maintains the same distance between the trench structure 22100 and the side surface multiple and firmly coupled to it. The firmly coupled driving module 21000 can stably provide driving power to the electroactive element 22000 .

Referring again to FIG. 43( a ), the trench structure 22100 may include a partial area of the first electrode 22010 adjacent to the side surface, a partial area of the intermediate layer 22030 adjacent to the side surface, and a second area adjacent to the side surface Part of the area of electrode 22050. The trench structure 22100 may have protrusions 22130 and recesses 22110 formed in regions of the first electrode 22010 , the intermediate layer 22030 and the second electrode 22050 adjacent to the side surfaces.

The recess 22110 may be defined as a region where a partial region of the first electrode 22010 and a partial region of the intermediate layer 22030 are removed. The protrusions 22130 may be defined as regions located between adjacent recesses 22110 .

The recess 22110 may allow the upper surface of the second electrode 22050 to be exposed toward the first electrode 22010. The upper surface of the second electrode 22050 may be exposed through the recess 22110.

The recess 22110 allows the region of the first electrode 22010 and the intermediate layer 22030 of the electroactive element 22000 viewed from the top to be seen as recessed.

Referring to FIG. 43( b ), the trench structure 22100 may include a contact region 22150 and a pad region 22140 .

The pad area 22140 may be defined as an area of a partial area of the second electrode 22050 exposed due to the plurality of recesses 22110 . The contact area 22150 may be defined as the protrusion 22130 of the first electrode 22010 . The contact area 22150 may be defined as the first protrusion 22131 .

The upper surface of the pad region 22140 may be exposed in the upward direction. The upper surface of the pad region 22140 may be exposed toward the first electrode 22010 .

Hereinafter, the driving module 21000 provided in the electroactive element 22000 will be described.

The drive module 21000 may be arranged in the area of the electroactive element 22000 . The driving module 21000 may be arranged adjacent to the side surface of the electroactive element 22000 . The driving module 21000 may be arranged in a partial area of the outer boundary of the electroactive element 22000 .

The driving module 21000 may cover a partial area of the electro-active element 22000 . The driving module 21000 may be positioned to cover the upper surface adjacent to the side surface of the electroactive element 22000 .

The driving module 21000 may cover the trench structure 22100 . The driving module 21000 may be located in the region where the trench structure 22100 is formed.

The driving module 21000 arranged in the electroactive element 22000 may be electrically connected to the electroactive element 22000 described above.

The drive module 21000 may be in contact with the electroactive element 22000 . The driving module 21000 may be in contact with a region adjacent to the side surface of the electroactive element 22000 .

The driving module 21000 may be in contact with the trench structure 22100 of the electro-active element 22000 . The driving module 21000 may be in contact with a region of the electroactive element 22000 included in the trench structure 22100 .

The driving module 21000 may be in contact with the pad area 22140 and the contact area 22150 included in the trench structure 22100 .

The driving module 21000 may be in contact with a region of the second electrode 22050 exposed toward the first electrode 22010 . The driving module 21000 may be in contact with the upper surface of the contact area 22150 . The driving module 21000 may be in contact with the pad area 22140 via the recess 22110 .

The driving module 21000 may be in contact with the upper surface of the pad area 22140 .

The electro-active element 22000 may receive drive power via the area of the electro-active element 22000 that is in contact with the drive module 21000 .

The electroactive element 22000 may receive drive power from the drive module 21000 in contact with the trench structure 22100 . The driving module 21000 may apply driving power to the trench structure 22100 .

The contact area 22150 and the pad area 22140 may receive driving power. The drive module 21000 can transmit drive power to the electro-active element 22000 via the contact area 22150 and the pad area 22140 .

The electroactive module 20200 included in the electroactive device 20001 has been described in detail above.

In the following, an electrochromic device as an example of the electroactive device 20001 will be described.

Electrochromic devices are devices whose optical state changes as a result of receiving electrical power.

The electrochromic element 22200 can change color when the electrochromic device receives power. Discoloration can include coloration and decolorization.

As a result of receiving electricity, the light transmittance and absorption rate of the electrochromic device can be changed.

Electrochromic devices can be used in car mirrors or smart windows that need to adjust light transmittance or light reflectivity.

The electrochromic device may include an electrochromic module, which is an example of the electroactive module 20200.

Hereinafter, the electrochromic module included in the electrochromic device will be described in detail.

An electrochromic module according to an embodiment of the present application may include an electrochromic element 22200 and a driving module 21000 .

The electrochromic module may be driven by receiving effective power from the power supply unit 20100 . The electrochromic module may include the electrochromic element 22200 as an example of the electroactive element 22000, and the above-described driving module 21000.

First, the electrochromic element 22200 included in the electrochromic module will be described.

FIG. 44 is a view illustrating an electrochromic element 22200 according to an embodiment of the present application.

When driving power is provided to the electrochromic element 22200, the optical state of the electrochromic element 22200 can change.

The optical state of the electrochromic element 22200 can be changed based on a redox reaction.

Predetermined electrochromic materials, electrons and electrochromic ions can participate in redox reactions. Electrochromic element 22200 may include electrochromic material, electrons, and electrochromic ions.

Electrochromic materials may be materials whose optical properties change due to redox reactions. Electrochromic ions may be ions that cause redox reactions. The electrons can move the electrochromic ions to the electrochromic material.

Referring to FIG. 44 , an electrochromic element 22200 may include electrode layers 22010 , 22050 and intermediate layers and have a trench structure 22100 . However, the layers shown in FIG. 44 are not required, and electrochromic element 22200 may also be implemented with more or fewer layers than those shown in FIG. 44 .

The electrode layer may include a first electrode 22010 and a second electrode 22050.

The intermediate layer 22030 may be disposed between the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050. The intermediate layer 22030 may include an electrochromic layer 22031 , an electrolyte layer 22032 and an ion storage layer 22033 .

The electrochromic layer 22031 may be in contact with the first electrode 22010 and in contact with the electrolyte layer 22032 .

The electrolyte layer 22032 may be in contact with the electrochromic layer 2031 and in contact with the ion storage layer 22033 .

The ion storage layer 22033 may be in contact with the electrolyte layer 22032 and in contact with the second electrode 22050 .

The electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033 are not limited to be formed in the above-described order shown in FIG. 44, and may be formed in the reverse order. For example, the electrochromic layer 22031 may be in contact with the electrolyte layer 22032 and in contact with the second electrode 22050 .

The electrode layer and the intermediate layer 22030 of the electrochromic element 22200 may be in a solid state.

Hereinafter, the electrode layer and the intermediate layer 22030 of the electrochromic element 22200 will be described in detail.

Referring again to FIG. 44 , the electrode layer of the electrochromic element 22200 according to an embodiment of the present application may include a first electrode 22010 and a second electrode 22050 .

The first electrode 22010 and/or the second electrode 22050 may be provided in a flat plate shape.

Electrons may move via the first electrode 22010 and/or the second electrode 22050 . Therefore, when electricity is supplied to the electrodes, current can flow in the electrodes and an electrical potential can be created in the electrodes.

The electrode layer may have predetermined optical properties.

The first electrode 22010 and/or the second electrode 22050 may transmit light. That is, each electrode may be implemented as a transparent electrode. For example, when the first electrode 22010 of the electrochromic element 22200 is a transparent electrode, the second electrode 22050 may also be implemented as a transparent electrode. Accordingly, light incident on the electrochromic element 22200 may pass through the first electrode 22010 and/or the second electrode 22050. Electrochromic elements 22200 including electrode layers having the optical properties described above can be used to implement smart windows.

When the electrode layer is implemented as a transparent electrode as described above, a metal doped with at least one of indium, tin, zinc and/or oxide may be selected as a material for implementing the electrode. For example, indium tin oxide (ITO) or zinc oxide (ZnO) may be selected as the material for realizing the transparent electrode.

Alternatively, one of the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 may be formed of a material capable of reflecting light. That is, one of the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 may be implemented as a reflective layer. When the first electrode 22010 of the electrochromic element 22200 is a transparent electrode, the second electrode 22050 may be implemented as a reflective layer such that light incident on the electrochromic element 22200 is reflected by the second electrode 22050 . Alternatively, when the second electrode 22050 is implemented as a transparent electrode, the first electrode 22010 may be implemented as a reflective layer. Thus, objects arranged to face the electrochromic element 22200 can be seen through the electrochromic element 22200 . Electrochromic elements 22200 including reflective layers can be used to implement smart mirrors.

In this case, the first electrode 22010 may be formed of a metal material having high reflectivity. The first electrode 10210 may include at least one of aluminum (Al), copper (Cu), molybdenum (Mo), chromium (Cr), titanium (Ti), gold (Au), silver (Ag), and tungsten (W). . The second electrode 22050 may be formed using a transparent conductive material.

The electrochromic element 22200 according to an embodiment of the present application may be implemented to be flexible. Correspondingly, the electrode layer can also be realized to be flexible. Alternatively, the electrochromic element 22200 may have curvature. Correspondingly, the electrode layer may also have a curvature.

Hereinafter, the intermediate layer 22030 of the electrochromic element 22200 will be described.

The intermediate layer 22030 of the electrochromic element 22200 according to embodiments of the present application may be electrochromic.

Referring again to FIG. 44 , the intermediate layer 22030 may include an electrochromic layer 22031 , an electrolyte layer 22032 and an ion storage layer 22033 .

The electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033 may be electrochromic.

Electrons may be injected into one of the electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033, and the electrons may be emitted from the remaining layers from which electrons were not injected. A redox reaction may be induced in the electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033 due to the transfer of electrons.

Electrochromic ions can migrate within the electrochromic element 22200 due to the transfer of electrons. Because electrons are provided in the electrochromic layer 22031 and/or the ion storage layer 22033, electrochromic ions including cathode ions such as OH- and anode ions such as H+ and Li+ can be injected into the electrochromic element 22200 or extracted from the electrochromic element 22200. The electrochromic element 22200 is discharged, and the electrochromic layer 22031 and/or the ion storage layer 22033 are oxidized/reduced due to the electrochromic ions, and the electrochromic layer 22031 and/or the ion storage layer 22033 are discolored.

The optical properties of the electrochromic layer 22031 may be changed based on a redox reaction.

The electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033 may change color. The light transmittance and light absorption rate of the electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033 may be changed.

The redox reactions occurring in the electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033 may be different reactions.

That is, when the electrochromic layer 22031 is oxidized, the ion storage layer 22033 may be reduced, and when the electrochromic layer 22031 is reduced, the ion storage layer 22033 may be oxidized.

Therefore, the ion storage layer 22033 may function as a counter electrode of the electrochromic layer 22031.

State changes corresponding to each other can be induced in the ion storage layer 22033 and the electrochromic layer 22031. For example, when the ion storage layer 22033 is oxidized and colored, the electrochromic layer 22031 may be reduced and colored, and when the ion storage layer 22033 is reduced and discolored, the electrochromic layer 22031 may be oxidized and discolored.

Alternatively, the opposite reaction to the electrochromic reaction in the electrochromic layer 22031 may occur in the ion storage layer 22033. For example, when the electrochromic layer 22031 is oxidized and colored, the ion storage layer 22033 may be reduced and discolored, and when the electrochromic layer 22031 is reduced and discolored, the ion storage layer 22033 may be oxidized and colored. The transmittance of the electrochromic element 22200 can be adjusted by the opposite reaction in the ion storage layer 22033 and the electrochromic layer 22031.

The electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033 may include materials capable of electrochromic. The electrochromic layer 22031 may include at least one oxide of TiO, V2O5, Nb2O5, Cr2O3, MnO2, FeO2, CoO2, NiO2, RhO2, Ta2O5, IrO2, and WO3. The ion storage layer 22033 may include at least one oxide of IrO2, NiO2, MnO2, CoO2, iridium-magnesium oxide, nickel-magnesium oxide, and/or titanium-vanadium oxide.

The electrolyte layer 22032 may be disposed between the electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033. The electrolyte layer 22032 may be an ion migration path between the electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033. The electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033 may exchange ions via the electrolyte layer 22032. The electrolyte layer 22032 can function as an ion transport layer and block electron transfer. The electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033 may be arranged in the electrochromic element 22200 to be insulated from each other while allowing ion conduction therebetween. That is, the electrolyte layer 22032 may prevent the transfer of electrons through the electrolyte layer 22032, but allow the transport of ions.

The electrolyte layer 22032 may include an insulating material. For example, the electrolyte layer 22032 may include SiO2, Al2O3, Nb2O3, Ta2O5, LiTaO3, LiNbO3, SiO2, Al2O3, Nb2O3, Ta2O5, LiTaO3, LiNbO3, La2TiO7, La2TiO7, SrZrO3, ZrO2, Y2O3, Nb2O5, La2Ti2O7, LaTiO3, HfO2, La2TiO7 , at least one of La2TiO7, SrZrO3, ZrO2, Y2O3, Nb2O5, La2Ti2O7, LaTiO3 and HfO2.

The electrode layer and the intermediate layer 22030 included in the electrochromic element 22200 have been described above. Hereinafter, the trench structure 22100 formed in the electrochromic element 22200 will be described.

The trench structure 22100 may be formed in the electrochromic element 22200 so that the electrochromic element 22200 can receive driving power. Due to the trench structure 22100, a partial area of the second electrode 22050 of the electrochromic element 22200 may be exposed.

The electrochromic element 22200 may be electrically connected to the driving module 21000 via the trench structure 22100 . The driving power may be transmitted to the electrochromic element 22200 via the trench structure 22100 .

Driving power may be supplied to the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 included in the trench structure 22100 of the electrochromic element 22200. When driving power is supplied to the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 , electrons may be supplied to the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 . Electrons supplied to the electrodes may be supplied to the intermediate layer 22030 . The supplied electrons can cause redox reactions in the electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033. Based on a redox reaction, the electrochromic element 22200 can be electrochromic.

The shape of the trench structure 22100 formed in the electrochromic element 22200 will be described in detail.

45 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic element 22200 in which trench structures according to embodiments of the present application are formed.

46 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic element in which a trench structure according to an embodiment of the present application is formed.

Hereinafter, description will be given with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 .

According to the embodiment of the present application, the trench structure 22100 may be formed in a region adjacent to the side surface of the electrochromic element 22200 according to the embodiment of the present application. Hereinafter, a case where the trench structure 22100 is formed along the side surface of the electrochromic element 22200 will be described as an example.

Referring to FIG. 45 , when the trench structure 22100 is formed, the electrochromic element 22200 may include a plurality of protrusions 22130 and recesses 22110 . The trench structure 22100 may include the first electrode 22010 , the electrochromic layer 22031 , the electrolyte layer 22032 , the ion storage layer 22033 , and the second electrode 22050 in regions adjacent to the side surfaces of the electrochromic element 22200 . A plurality of recesses 22110 and a plurality of protrusions 22130 may be formed in regions of the first electrode 22010 , the electrochromic layer 22031 , the electrolyte layer 22032 , and the ion storage layer 22033 adjacent to the side surfaces of the electrochromic element 22200 .

The recess 22110 may include a first recess 22111, a second recess 22113, a third recess 22115 and a fourth recess 22117, and the protrusion 22130 may include a first protrusion 22131, a second protrusion 22133, a third protrusion 22135 and a fourth protrusion 22130 Bump 22137.

The first electrode 22010 may include a first protrusion 22131 and a first recess 22111. The electrochromic layer 22031 may include second protrusions 22133 and second recesses 22113 . The electrolyte layer 22032 may include third protrusions 22135 and third recesses 22115 , and the ion storage layer 22033 may include fourth protrusions 22137 and fourth recesses 22117 .

A region of the second electrode 22050 may be exposed through the recess 22110. The second electrode 22050 may be exposed toward the first electrode 22010 through the recess 22110 . The second electrode 22050 may be exposed toward the driving module 21000 disposed in the electrochromic element 22200 .

The protrusions 22130 may be arranged between the recesses 22110 adjacent to each other.

The trench structures 22100 may be defined by recesses 22110 and protrusions 22130 .

The trench structure 22100 may include a plurality of pad regions 22140 and a plurality of contact regions 22150 .

The pad area 22140 may be defined as the area of the second electrode 22050 exposed due to the plurality of recesses 22110 . The upper surface of the pad region 22140 may be exposed in the upward direction. The pad region 22140 may be exposed toward the first electrode 22010 .

The upper surface of the contact area 22150 may be exposed in an upward direction. The contact area 22150 may be defined as the protrusion 22130 of the first electrode 22010 . The contact area 22150 may be the first protrusion 22131 .

The recesses 22110 and the protrusions 22130 may have predetermined surfaces.

The trench structure 22100 may include a plurality of recessed surfaces 22160 , a plurality of raised surfaces, and a plurality of connecting surfaces 22170 .

The recessed surface 22160 may be defined as the side surface of the electrochromic element 22200 exposed in the Y-axis direction by the recess 22110 .

The raised surface may be defined as the side surface of the protrusion 22130 . The raised surface may be the same surface as the side surface of the electrochromic element in which the trench structure is not formed. The convex surface may be a surface parallel to the X-axis direction.

The connecting surface 22170 may be the surface of the protrusion 22130 connecting the raised surface to the recessed surface 22160. The connection surface 22170 may be the surface that connects the pad area 22140 to the contact area 22150 . The connecting surface 22170 may be a surface that connects the convex surface to the concave surface 22160 and is parallel to the Y-axis.

The plurality of recessed surfaces 22160 , raised surfaces, and connecting surfaces 22170 may define the outer shape of the trench structure 22100 .

The recessed surface 22160 may be a region of the first electrode 22010 , the electrochromic layer 22031 , the electrolyte layer 22032 and the ion storage layer 22033 exposed in the outer direction through the recess. Due to the recessed surface 22160, the cross-sections of the first electrode 22010, the electrochromic layer 22031, the electrolyte layer 22032, and the ion storage layer 22033 may be exposed in the outer direction.

The raised surface may be the outermost surface of the first electrode 22010 , the electrochromic layer 22031 , the electrolyte layer 22032 and the ion storage layer 22033 . The raised surfaces adjacent to each other may be opposed to each other to face each other.

The connection surface 22170 may expose each layer of the electrochromic element 22200 between the raised surface and the recessed surface 22160. The connection surface 22170 may be in contact with the pad region 22140 . The connection surface 22170 of the ion storage layer 22033 may be in contact with the pad region 22140 .

The convex surface of the protrusion 22130 may be positioned to have the same surface as the side surface of the second electrode 22050 . The convex surfaces of the first to fourth protrusions 22131 to 22137 may have the same surface as the side surface of the second electrode 22050 .

The plurality of recesses 22110 and the plurality of protrusions 22130 may be designed in various specifications. Hereinafter, the dimensions of the recesses 22110 and the protrusions 22130 will be described.

Referring to FIG. 46, the depressions and protrusions may have predetermined sizes. There may be a predetermined interval between the depressions and the protrusions. The connecting surface, the concave surface and the convex surface may have predetermined dimensions.

The connecting surface may have a predetermined length in the inner and outer directions. The length of the first connection surface may be the first length t1 and the length of the second connection surface may be the second length t2.

The concave and convex surfaces may have predetermined widths.

The recesses may be formed to be spaced apart from adjacent recesses by a predetermined distance d. The protrusions may be formed to be spaced apart from adjacent protrusions by a predetermined distance d.

The size of the above-mentioned regions included in the trench structure may vary according to the purpose achieved. The dimensions of the depressions and protrusions 22130 can be varied. The dimensions of the connecting surface, recessed surface and raised surface of the trench structure can be varied.

The length of the connecting surface can be changed. The length of the first connection surface may be set as the first length t1, and the length of the second connection surface may be set as the second length t2. Although the first length and the second length may be set to be equal to each other, the lengths may also be set to be different from each other depending on the purpose of implementation.

The width of the bumps can be changed. The width of the recess can be changed. The first width w1 and the second width w2 may be changed.

The distance d between the protrusions and the depressions can vary.

The electrochromic element 22200 has been described above. Hereinafter, the driving module 21000 will be described.

The driving module 21000 according to an embodiment of the present application may generate driving power for driving the electrochromic element 22200 and transmit the driving power to the electrochromic element 22200 .

The driving module 21000 may include a driving unit 21300 and an electrical connection member 21500 .

The driving unit 21300 may generate driving power.

The electrical connection member 21500 can transmit driving power to the electrochromic element 22200 .

The electrical connection member 21500 may transmit the driving power generated by the driving unit 21300 to the electrochromic element 22200 .

Hereinafter, each element of the driving module 21000 will be described. First, the electrical connection member 21500 will be described.

FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an electrical connection member according to an embodiment of the present application.

The electrical connection member 21500 included in the electrochromic module according to the embodiment of the present application may include a conductive area.

The electrical connection member 21500 may be a conductor 21530 that conducts electricity in one direction and insulates in the other direction. That is, the electrical connection member 21500 may be an anisotropic conductive film (Anisotropic Conducting Film ACF).

Referring to FIG. 47 , an electrical connection member 21500 according to an embodiment of the present application may include a base 21510 and a plurality of conductors 21530 . However, the elements shown in FIG. 14 are not necessary, and an electrical connection member 21500 having more or less elements than those shown in FIG. 35 may also be implemented.

Conductor 21530 may be conductive.

The base portion 21510 may define an outer shape of the electrical connection member 21500 , and the conductor 21530 may be contained in the base portion 21510 .

Hereinafter, the configuration of the electrical connection member 21500 will be described in detail.

Conductor 21530 may be conductive. Drive power may be transmitted to electrochromic element 22200 via conductor 21530.

Conductor 21530 may have electrical insulating properties in one direction and conductive properties in the other direction. Conductor 21530 may conduct electricity in a first direction and insulate in a second direction. The second direction may be a direction other than the first direction. For example, the second direction may be a direction perpendicular to the first direction. The first direction may be the direction in which the external force is applied.

Conductor 21530 may include surface 21531 and interior 21532. The surface 21531 and the interior 21532 can be realized in different materials. Although the conductors are shown in FIG. 35 as having the same size, this is only an example, and the conductors may have different sizes.

The conductors 21530 can be classified according to the material forming the surface 21531 and the interior 21532.

Types of conductors 21530 may include i) conductive coated conductors 21540 having conductive surfaces 21541 and insulating interiors 21542, conductive surfaces 21541 being conductive and insulating interiors 21542 insulating, and ii) insulating surfaces 21546 and Conductive inner insulating coated conductor 21545.

The conductive surface 21541 of the conductive coated conductor 21540 may be a surface 21531 formed of a conductive material, and the insulating interior 21542 may be an interior 21532 formed of an insulating material. The insulating surface 21546 of the insulating coated conductor 21545 may be a surface 21531 formed from an insulating material, and the conductive interior 21547 may be an interior 21532 formed from a conductive material.

The conductive material may be a material such as gold, silver, nickel and copper, and the insulating material may be a material such as an insulating organic polymer.

As shown in FIG. 47 , the shape of the conductor 21530 may be spherical, but the shape of the conductor 21530 is not limited thereto. The size of the conductor 21530 may be appropriately adjusted depending on the purpose of implementation.

The base 21510 may be in contact with the electroactive element 22000 and the driving unit 21300 .

The base 21510 may define the outer shape of the electrical connection member 21500 . The base 21510 may be a filler.

The base 21510 may be implemented in the form of a thin film or a predetermined gel whose outer shape is deformable. Hereinafter, a description will be given by assuming that the base 21510 is a thin film. That is, the electrical connection member 21500 may be implemented using a thin film. The outer shape of the base 21510 may be changed due to external force. That is, the volume of the base 21510 may be compressed due to an external force.

The plurality of conductors 21530 may be randomly arranged in the base 21510 . Alternatively, the plurality of conductors 21530 may be uniformly arranged in the base 21510 .

The base 21510 may fix the position of the conductor 21530 so that the conductor 21530 can maintain a predetermined positional relationship with the driving unit 21300 and the electroactive element 22000 .

The base 21510 may be adhesive. The base 21510 may be adhered to the driving unit 21300 and the electrochromic element 22200. The lower surface of the base 21510 may be attached to the lower surface of the electrochromic element 22200 , and the upper surface of the base 21510 may be attached to the lower surface of the driving unit 21300 .

A separate adhesive material may be applied over at least a portion of the base 21510. Adhesive material may be applied on the upper and lower surfaces of the base 21510. The upper surface of the base 21510 may be adhered to the lower surface of the driving unit 21300 by the adhesive material applied on the upper surface of the base 21510 . The lower surface of the base 21510 may be adhered to the upper surface of the electrochromic element 22200 by an adhesive material applied on the lower surface of the base 21510.

By adhering the base 21510 to the drive unit 21300 and the electrochromic element 22200, the electrical connection between at least some of the conductors 21530 in the base 21510 and the drive unit 21300 can be maintained. The electrical connection relationship between at least some of the conductors 21530 in the base 21510 and the electrochromic layer 22031 can also be maintained. The electrical stability of the electrochromic module can be improved by the adhesion of the base 21510.

Meanwhile, the base 21510 may have insulating properties. The base 21510 may have insulating properties in a region other than the region containing the conductor 21530 .

That is, the base portion 21510 may electrically insulate a region other than the region including the conductor 21530 while allowing the driving unit 21300, the electroactive element 22000 and the conductor 21530 to contact the base portion 21510, thereby improving the anisotropy of the electrical connection member 21500 .

Hereinafter, the electrical conductivity and insulating properties of the electrical connection member 21500 will be described in detail.

FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an anisotropic conductor having conductivity and insulation according to an embodiment of the present application.

Conductivity may be imparted to the electrical connection member 21500 by an external force. Conductor 21530 may conduct electricity in one direction due to external force. The external force can be pressure.

Meanwhile, the electrical connection member 21500 may be insulated in a direction different from the direction in which the electrical connection member 21500 conducts electricity.

The electrical connection member 21500 may have conductivity by receiving an external force. The outer shape of the base 21510 may be changed due to external force. That is, the base 21510 may be compressed. Due to the deformation of the base 21510, the density of the conductors 21530 in the base 21510 may change.

Referring to FIG. 48( a ), when the conductor 21530 is the conductive coating conductor 21540 , the electrical connection member 21500 can receive an external force in one direction, and has conductivity and insulation. The electrical connection member 21500 may have conductivity in a direction corresponding to the first direction. The electrical connection member 21500 may have insulating properties in a second direction, wherein the second direction is different from the first direction.

When an external force is applied to the electrical connection member 21500 in a direction corresponding to the first direction, the conductive coating conductors 21540 may come into contact with each other. As the shape of the base 21510 changes, the conductive coating conductors 21540 included in the base 21510 may come into contact with each other. However, there may still be conductive coated conductors 21540 that are not in contact with each other.

When the conductive coated conductors 21540 come into contact with each other due to an external force, driving power may be transmitted along the conductive surfaces 21541 of the conductive coated conductors 21540 in contact with each other. That is, the conductive path C may be formed along the conductive surface 21541 . The conductive path C may be a conductive path C formed when the plurality of conductors 21530 become in contact with each other and the plurality of conductors 21530 in contact with each other become in contact with the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 . The conductive path C may be formed in a direction corresponding to one direction.

The electrical connection member 21500 may be insulated in a direction different from the one direction. Bases 21510 may exist between conductive coated conductors 21540 that are adjacent to each other but not in contact with each other. The conductive coating conductors 21540 that are adjacent to each other but not in contact with each other may be insulated from each other by the base 21510 .

As shown in FIG. 48( b ), when the conductor 21530 is the insulating-coated conductor 21545, the electrical connection member 21500 can conduct electricity in a direction corresponding to the direction in which the external force is applied. The conductive interior 21547 may be exposed through the insulating surfaces 21546 of the insulating coated conductors 21545 that are spaced apart from each other. Meanwhile, the insulating coated conductors 21545 may be in contact with each other. The exposed conductive interiors 21547 of the insulating coated conductors 21545 may be in contact with each other. Conductive paths C may be formed along conductive interiors 21547 of insulating coated conductors 21545 in contact with each other. Drive power can be transmitted along the conductive interiors 21547 that are in contact with each other. The conductive path C may be formed in a direction corresponding to the direction in which the external force is applied.

The electrical connection member 21500 may be insulated in a second direction different from the first direction. Due to the insulating material of the insulating surface 21546, the insulating coated conductors 21545 adjacent to each other may be insulated from each other.

For convenience of description, the following embodiments will be described by assuming that the conductor 21530 included in the electrical connection member 21500 is the "insulation-coated conductor 21545".

The electrical connection member 21500 included in the driving module 21000 of the electrochromic module has been described above. Hereinafter, the driving unit 21300 and the driving substrate 21310 will be described.

FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an electrical connection member and a driving substrate according to an embodiment of the present application.

Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIG. 49 .

The driving unit 21300 according to an embodiment of the present application may generate driving power. Driving power can be transmitted to the electrochromic element 22200. The driving unit 21300 may apply driving power to the electrical connection member 21500 , and the electrical connection member 21500 may transmit the driving power to the electrochromic element 22200 .

The driving unit 21300 included in the electrochromic module may be arranged on a predetermined driving substrate 21310 . The driving unit 21300 may be implemented on the driving substrate 21310 .

A plurality of connection members 21330 may be arranged in the driving substrate 21310 . The connection member 21330 may electrically connect the driving unit 21300 to the electrochromic element 22200. The connection member 21330 may output driving power to the electrochromic element 22200. The connection member 21330 may receive driving power from the driving unit 21300 . The connection member 21330 may receive driving power from the output unit 21305 .

The characteristics of the driving power output from the plurality of connection members 21330 may be different for each connection member. The first driving power may be output through the first connection member 21331 , and the second driving power may be output through the second connection member 21333 . The output of the driving power through the connection member 21330 may be controlled by the driving unit 21300 . Alternatively, different driving powers may be output from each connection member 21330 due to different electrical characteristics of the connection members 21330 . That is, the resistance of the first connection member 21331 and the resistance of the second connection member 21333 may be different from each other. Therefore, the first driving power output through the first connection member 21331 can be controlled at the first voltage level, and the second driving power output through the second connection member 21333 can be controlled at the second voltage level.

The plurality of connection members 21330 may be formed separately from each other.

A plurality of connection members 21330 may be formed on the lower surface of the driving substrate 21310 and connected to the driving unit 21300. Alternatively, a plurality of connection members 21330 may be connected to the driving unit 21300 via the upper surface of the driving substrate 21310 . In this case, the plurality of connection members 21330 may also be formed on the upper surface of the driving substrate 21310 through through holes passing through the driving substrate 21310 .

The connection member 21330 may be implemented using a conductive material. For example, the connection member 21330 may be implemented using a metallic material such as copper.

Each configuration of the driving module 21000 of the electrochromic module has been described above. Hereinafter, the electrical connection relationship between the electrical connection member 21500 and the driving unit 21300 will be described.

The electrical connection member 21500 and the driving substrate 21310 according to an embodiment of the present application may be electrically connected to each other. The electrical connection member 21500 may be electrically connected to the connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 .

The driving substrate 21310 may be arranged on the upper surface of the electrical connection member 21500 .

Referring to FIG. 49( a ), the driving substrate 21310 may cover the upper surface of the electrical connection member 21500 . The driving substrate 21310 may completely cover the upper surface of the base 21510 .

Referring to FIG. 49( b ), the connection member 21330 may be in contact with the upper surface of the base 21510 .

The base 21510 may include multiple regions. The base 21510 may include a first base region 21511 and a second base region 21512. The driving substrate 21310 may include a plurality of connection members 21330 . The connection member 21330 may include a first connection member 21331 and a second connection member 21333 . The first base region 21511 may be in contact with the first connection member 21331 , and the second base region 21512 may be in contact with the second connection member 21333 .

A plurality of connecting members 21330 may be located in each base region. The number of the connection members 21330 arranged in the electrical connection member 21500 can be adjusted for each area thereof. The plurality of first connection members 21331 may be in contact with the first base region 21511 , and the plurality of second connection members 21333 may be in contact with the second base region 21512 . The number of the first connection members 21331 placed on the first base region 21511 and the number of the second connection members 21333 placed on the second base region 21512 may be different from each other.

The insulating coated conductor 21545 included in the base 21510 may be electrically connected to the driving unit 21300 . The insulating coated conductors 21545 may include a first insulating coated conductor 21533 and a second insulating coated conductor 21534. The first insulating coating conductor 21533 may be in contact with the first connection member 21331 , and the second insulating coating conductor 21534 may be in contact with the second connection member 21333 .

A predetermined external force may be applied to the electrical connection member 21500 so that the insulating coated conductor 21545 is brought into contact with the connection member of the driving substrate.

The driving unit 21300 may transmit driving power to the electrical connection member 21500 . The driving unit 21300 may apply driving power to the transmission area of the electrical connection member 21500 via the connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 . The driving power may include first driving power and second driving power.

For each area of the electrical connection member 21500, the driving unit may apply driving power to the electrochromic element 22200. The driving unit may transmit the first driving power to the electrochromic element 22200 through the first base region 21511 , and transmit the second driving power to the electrochromic element 22200 through the second base region 21512 .

The driving power may be transmitted to the electrochromic element 22200 via the electrical connection member 21500 . The driving module 21000 and the electrochromic element 22200 may be electrically connected such that driving power is applied to the electrochromic element 22200 .

The connection relationship between the configurations of the drive modules 21000 has been described above.

Hereinafter, the connection relationship between the electrochromic element 22200 and each configuration of the above-described driving module 21000 will be described.

FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic module according to an embodiment of the present application.

51 is a side view illustrating an electrochromic element, an electrical connection member, and a driving substrate according to an embodiment of the present application.

Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51 .

The electrochromic element 22200 according to an embodiment of the present application and the above-described driving module 21000 may be electrically connected to each other. The electrochromic element 22200 and the driving module 21000 may have conductive paths.

The driving module 21000 may be arranged adjacent to the electrochromic element 22200 .

Referring to FIG. 50 , the above-described driving module 21000 may be arranged in the electrochromic element 22200 . The driving module 21000 may be arranged in an upper region adjacent to the side surface of the electrochromic element 22200 . The driving module 21000 may be arranged in the trench structure 22100 of the electrochromic element 22200 . The driving module 21000 may be arranged adjacent to a region included in the trench structure 22100 . The driving module 21000 may be arranged on the upper surface of the trench structure 22100 .

The driving module 21000 may include an electrical connection member 21500 and a driving substrate 21310 . The electrical connection member 21500 may be in contact with the electrochromic element 22200, and the driving substrate 21310 may be in contact with the electrical connection member. The electrical connection member 21500 may be arranged between the electrochromic element 22200 and the driving substrate 21310 . The driving substrate 21310 may be arranged on the upper surface of the electrical connection member 21500 .

The electrical connection member 21500 of the driving module 21000 may be in contact with the electrochromic element 22200 .

The electrical connection member 21500 may be connected to the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 of the electrochromic element 22200 . The electrical connection member 21500 may be connected to the region of the first electrode 22010 and the region of the second electrode 22050 in the trench structure 22100 . The driving module 21000 may be in contact with the recesses 22110 and the protrusions 22130 of the trench structure 22100 . The driving module 21000 may be in contact with the contact area 22150 of the first electrode 22010 and the pad area 22140 of the second electrode 22050 .

Referring to FIG. 51 , the base 21510 of the electrical connection member 21500 may be disposed on the upper surface of the electrochromic element 22200 . The base 21510 of the electrical connection member 21500 may be arranged to be in contact with the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 of the electrochromic element 22200 . The base 21510 may be arranged in the trench structure 22100 . The base 21510 may be in contact with the contact region 22150 of the first electrode 22010 and the pad region 22140 of the second electrode 22050 included in the trench structure 22100 .

The base 21510 may be inserted into the recess of the trench structure 22100 . The bases 21510 inserted into the recesses can be in contact with each area of the electrochromic element 22200.

The base 21510 can be inserted into the recess. The inserted base 21510 can be in contact with each area of the electrochromic element 22200.

The base 21510 may be in contact with each layer of the electrochromic element 22200 exposed due to the trench structure 22100 .

The base 21510 may be in contact with regions of the electrochromic element 22200 of the layers facing each other. The base 21510 may be in contact with the connection surface 22170 . The bases 21510 may be located between the connecting surfaces 22170 adjacent to each other.

The base 21510 may be in contact with the second electrode 22050 exposed in the upward direction. The base 21510 may be in contact with the second electrode 22050 having an upper surface exposed toward the first electrode 22010 . The base 21510 may be in contact with the pad region 22140 .

The side surface of the base 21510 may be the same surface as the side surface of the electrochromic element 22200 .

Alternatively, the base 21510 may protrude in the outer direction of the electrochromic element 22200.

A predetermined external force may be applied to the electrochromic element 22200 and the driving module 21000 so that the electrochromic element 22200 and the driving module 21000 are brought into contact with each other. The electrochromic element 22200 and the electrical connection member 21500 may be in contact with each other due to an external force. The base 21510 of the electrical connection member 21500 may be in contact with the electrochromic element 22200 due to an external force. The outer shape of the base portion 21510 may be deformed, and the base portion 21510 may be in contact with the electrochromic element 22200 .

As the outer shape of the base 21510 is deformed, the base 21510 inserted into the recess 22110 may partially protrude in the outer direction of the electrochromic element 22200. When the base portion 21510 protrudes in the outer direction of the electrochromic element 22200, there is an effect of improving the reliability of the electrical connection with the driving substrate 21310. Compared with the case where the base 21510 is not protruded, the area of the protruding base 21510 in contact with the driving substrate 21310 may be widened. As the area of the base 21510 in contact with the driving substrate 21310 is widened, the area of the base 21510 that receives the driving power may be widened. As the area of the base 21510 that receives the driving power becomes wider, there are effects of reducing contact resistance, reducing voltage distortion, and reducing power consumption.

Due to the adhesiveness of the base 21510, the driving substrate 21310 can be firmly adhered to the base 21510 as the contact area becomes wider. When the driving substrate 21310 is firmly adhered to the base 21510, the base 21510 can stably receive driving power. Therefore, the present application may have improved electrical connection reliability.

The insulating coated conductors 21545 of the electrical connection member 21500 may be in contact with the electrochromic element 22200. Insulation coated conductors 21545 included in base 21510 can be in contact with electrochromic element 22200.

Some of the plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 may be in contact with electrode layers in the trench structure. Some of the insulating coated conductors 21545 of the plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 may be in contact with the first electrode 22010 or the second electrode 22050 located in the trench structure 22100 . Some of the insulation coated conductors 21545 of the plurality of insulation coated conductors may be in contact with the pad region 22140 or the contact region 22150.

Some insulating coated conductors 21545 may have conductive interiors 21547 in contact with either the first electrode 22010 or the second electrode 22050. Some insulating coated conductors 21545 may have conductive interiors 21547 in contact with pad areas or contact areas. Some insulating coated conductors 21545 may have conductive interiors 21547 exposed and in contact with either the first electrode 22010 or the second electrode 22050.

A plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 may be located between the first connection member 21331 and the contact region 22150 . The plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 may form at least one conductive path. The first connection member 21331 and the contact region 22150 may be electrically connected through a conductive path. The driving voltage of the driving unit 21300 may be applied to the electrochromic element 22200 via the first connection member 21331 , the conductive path and the contact area 22150 .

Conductive paths may be formed by the conductive interior portions 21547 of the plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 contacting each other. The conductive paths may be formed by the conductive inner portions 21547 of the insulating coated conductors 21545 in contact with the first electrode 22010 or the second electrode 22050 contacting each other. The conductive paths may be formed by the exposed conductive interiors 21547 of the insulating coated conductors 21545 contacting each other.

Some of the insulating coated conductors 21545 of the plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 located between the first connection member and the contact area may not form a conductive path.

The base and at least one insulating coated conductor can be located in the recess of each layer included in the electrochromic element 22200.

A plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 may be located between the second connection member 21333 and the pad region 22140. Some of the insulating coated conductors 21545 may form at least one conductive path. The second connection member 21333 and the pad region 22140 may be electrically connected through a conductive path. The driving voltage of the driving unit 21300 may be applied to the electrochromic element 22200 via the second connection member 21333 , the conductive path and the pad region 22140 .

The different conductive paths may be electrically insulated from each other. The insulating coated conductors 21545 that exist between conductive paths may not form conductive paths. Even when the plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 are in contact with each other, the plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 may not form a conductive path. The insulating coated conductors 21545 may be electrically insulated from each other even when the different insulating coated conductors 21545 are in contact with each other. Even when the insulating coated conductors 21545 are in contact with each other, the insulating coated conductors 21545 that are not electrically connected to the pad region 22140 or the contact region 22150 cannot form a conductive path.

The base 21510 may be insulated between conductive paths. The base 21510 cannot form conductive paths between conductive paths adjacent to each other. The base 21510 may be disposed between a plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 that form conductive paths and insulating coated conductors 21545 that do not form conductive paths.

The different conductive paths may be insulated from each other by the insulating surface 21546 of the insulating coated conductor 21545. The insulating surface 21546 of the insulation-coated conductor 21545 may be located between the different conductive paths.

The insulating coated conductor 21545 may be in contact with the intermediate layer 22030 of the trench structure. When the base 21510 is inserted into the recess 22110, some of the insulating coated conductors 21545 may be in contact with the electrochromic layer 22031, the electrolyte layer 22032 and the ion storage layer 22033. Some insulating coated conductors 21545 may be in contact with recessed or connecting surfaces 22170. The insulating surface 21546 of the insulating coated conductor 21545 may be in contact with the recessed surface or connecting surface 22170.

The connection between the electrical connection member 21500 and the electrochromic element 22200 has been described above. Hereinafter, the connection between the electrical connection member 21500 and the driving substrate 21310 will be described.

The connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 may be in contact with the upper surface of the electrical connection member 21500 .

The connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 may be formed to correspond to the area of the base 21510 or the trench structure 22100 . The connection member 21330 may be formed to correspond to the contact area 22150 or the pad area 22140 . The connection member 21330 may be arranged at a position corresponding to the contact area 22150 or the pad area 22140 . The connection member 21330 may be arranged to face the contact area 22150 or the pad area 22140 .

The connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 may be in contact with the insulating coating conductor 21545 included in the base 21510 .

Some of the insulation-coated conductors 21545 of the plurality of insulation-coated conductors 21545 may be in contact with the connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 that outputs driving power. The conductive inner portion 21547 of the insulating coated conductor 21545 may be in contact with the connecting member.

Some of the plurality of insulation coated conductors 21545 may be in contact with the first connection member 21331 , or some of the plurality of insulation coated conductors 21545 may be in contact with the second connection member 21333 .

Due to the above-mentioned contact between the electrochromic element 22200 , the electrical connection member 21500 and the driving substrate 21310 , the electrochromic element 22200 may be electrically connected to the driving unit 21300 .

A conductive path may be formed between the electrochromic element 22200 and the connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 . The conductive paths may be formed by insulating coated conductors 21545 disposed between the drive substrate 21310 and the electrochromic element 22200. The conductive path may be formed by the insulating coated conductor 21545 in contact with the connecting member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 and the electrochromic element 22200. When some of the insulating coated conductors 21545 of the plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 in contact with each other are in contact with the first connecting member 21331 and the pad region 22140, a conductive path may be formed between the first connecting member 21331 and the pad region 22140 . When some insulating coated conductors 21545 of the plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 contacting each other are in contact with the second connecting member 21333 and the contact region 22150, a conductive path may be formed between the second connecting member 21333 and the contact region 22150.

The insulating coated conductor 21545 disposed between the drive substrate 21310 and the electrochromic element 22200 may form a conductive path. The conductive paths may be formed by insulating coated conductors 21545 in contact with the connecting members 21330 of the drive substrate 21310 and the electrochromic element 22200 .

The driving power may be transmitted to the electrochromic element 22200 through the electrical connection between the electrochromic element 22200 , the electrical connection member 21500 , and the driving substrate 21310 .

The driving power generated in the driving substrate 21310 may be transmitted to the electrical connection member 21500 and the electrochromic element 22200 . The driving power may be output through the connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 . The driving power from the driving substrate 21310 may be applied to the plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545. A plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 can transmit drive power to the electrochromic element 22200. A plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 can apply drive power to the electrochromic element 22200 via the conductive interiors 21547 in contact with each other.

Some of the insulating coated conductors 21545 may receive drive power via the conductive interior 21547 in contact with the connecting member 21330. Some insulating coated conductors 21545 can transmit drive power to the electrochromic element via a conductive interior 21547 in contact with the electrode layer. Some of the insulating coated conductors 21545 can transmit drive power to the electrochromic element via a conductive interior 21547 in contact with the pad area 22140 or the contact area 22150.

Insulation coated conductors 21545 cannot transmit drive power via insulated surfaces 21546. The insulating surface 21546 can prevent the transmission of drive power to the electrochromic element 22200. The insulating surface 21546 in contact with the electrochromic element 22200 may not transmit drive power to the electrochromic element.

Insulated surfaces 21546 of some of the plurality of insulation coated conductors 21545 may be in contact with the electrochromic element 22200. The insulating surface 21546 can be in contact with the connection surface 22170 or the recessed surface.

Some of the insulating coated conductors 21545 of the plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 may have insulating surfaces 21546 in contact with each other.

When the electrochromic element 22200 receives drive power from the drive module 21000, the optical state of the electrochromic element 22000 may change.

Driving power can be applied to each area of the electrochromic element 22200. The first driving power may be applied to the plurality of first insulating coated conductors 21533 connected to the first connection member 21331 , and may be transmitted to the contact region 22150 of the first electrode 22010 . The second driving power may be applied to the plurality of second insulating coated conductors 21534 connected to the second connecting member 21333 and may be transmitted to the pad region 22140 of the second electrode 22050 .

The optical state of the electrochromic element 22200 can be changed based on the drive voltage. The electrochromic ions included in the electrochromic element 22200 can migrate due to the driving voltage. A redox reaction may occur in the electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033 due to the migration of electrochromic ions. Due to the redox reaction, the light transmittance and light absorption rate of the electrochromic element 22200 may change.

A ground voltage may be selected as at least one of the first driving power applied to the first electrode 22010 and the second driving power applied to the second electrode 22050 as a reference voltage. The potential developed in the electrochromic element 22200 can be measured relative to a ground voltage.

As described above, the electrical connection member 21500 may receive a predetermined pressure and be disposed in the electrochromic element 22200. Due to the pressure, the electrical connection member 21500 may have a predetermined shape. Therefore, the arrangement of the insulating coating conductors 21545 included in the electrical connection member 21500 can be changed. Hereinafter, a predetermined shape of the electrical connection member 21500 will be described.

The upper surface of the anisotropic conductive film (ACF) may have a curved shape. The curved shape may correspond to a trench structure. The curved shape may correspond to the shape of the protrusions and depressions of the trench structure. As a result, the curved shape may correspond to the contact area 22150 and the pad area 22140.

The characteristics of the driving power generated by the driving unit 21300 and the driving power applied to the electrochromic element 22200 may be different. That is, during the process in which the driving power is transmitted to the electrochromic element 22200, the driving power generated by the driving unit 21300 may undergo a predetermined change. For example, the magnitude of the driving power may be reduced due to a voltage drop phenomenon.

The order of stacking the electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033 of the electrochromic element 22200 described above may be reversed. Therefore, the descriptions related to the electrochromic layer 22031 and the ion storage layer 22033 may be reversed. For example, although it has been described above that the electrochromic layer 22031 is in contact with the first electrode 22010 and the ion storage layer 22033 is in contact with the second electrode 22050, the electrochromic layer 22031 may be in contact with the second electrode 22050 when the stacking order is reversed , and the ion storage layer 22033 may be in contact with the first electrode 22010.

Although it has been described above that the driving power is transmitted to the contact area 22150 and the pad area 22140 of the electrochromic element 22200, the driving power may also be transmitted to areas of the first electrode 22010 that are not the pad area 22140 or the contact area 22150. A region of the first electrode 22010 that is not the contact region 22150 may be a region of the first electrode 22010 positioned inward from the trench structure 22100 .

The elements and connections between elements of the electrochromic module have been described above. In the following, the process of manufacturing the electroactive device 20001 will be described.

The case where the electroactive device 20001 is an electrochromic device will be described as an example.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the processing sequence of the electrochromic device according to the embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 52 , the steps of the processing may include manufacturing the electrochromic element (S21510), laser processing (S21520), positioning the drive module (S21530), compression/heating (S21540), and packaging (S21550). Although all of steps S21510 to S21550 may be performed, it is not necessary to perform all of steps S21510 to S21550 every time, and some of steps S21510 to S21550 may be omitted.

In the manufacture of the electrochromic element (S21510), the electrochromic element 22200 may be formed. In this step, the first electrode 22010, electrochromic layer 22031, electrolyte layer 22032, ion storage layer 22033 and The second electrode 22050.

A predetermined process may be performed to form the trench structure 22100 of the electrochromic element 22200 . To form the trench structure 22100, a process of ablating the first electrode 22010, the electrochromic layer 22031, the electrolyte layer 22032, and the ion storage layer 22033 of the electrochromic element 22200 may be performed. A process that allows the upper surface of the second electrode 22050 of the electrochromic element 22200 to be exposed may be performed. The process of forming the trench structure 22100 may be referred to as an ablation process. The ablation process can include i) a contact process, in which each layer of the electrochromic element 22200 is removed using a tool that is in direct contact with the electrochromic element 22200, and ii) a non-contact process, in which no contact with the electrochromic element 22200 is used. 22200 Remove each layer without touching the tool.

Hereinafter, laser processing ( S21520 ) as an example of the non-contact processing of the above-described ablation processing will be described.

Laser processing may be performed based on the size, shape, and opening interval of the recesses designed according to the realization purpose ( S21520 ).

The laser treatment (S21520) may be a treatment in which a laser is used to heat and melt the area of the electrochromic element 22200, and a high pressure gas is used to blow the heated/melted area to remove the heated/melted area from the electrochromic element 22200 Area.

The laser may heat and melt the first electrode 22010, the electrochromic layer 22031, the electrolyte layer 22032, and the ion storage layer 22033 to remove the first electrode 22010, the electrochromic layer 22031, the electrolyte layer 22032, and the ion storage layer 22033, so that the electro- The upper surface of the second electrode 22050 of the color changing element 22200 is exposed.

In the positioning of the driving module ( S21530 ), the driving module 21000 for driving the electrochromic element 22200 may be arranged in the electrochromic element 22200 . The driving module 21000 may be arranged in the electrochromic element 22200 such that a control signal may be transmitted to the electrochromic element 22200 via the area of the electrochromic element 22200 in which the trench structure 22100 is formed.

The electrical connection member 21500 included in the driving module 21000 may be arranged in the groove structure of the electrochromic element 22200 .

The driving substrate 21310 in which the driving unit 21300 is implemented may be arranged around the electrochromic element 22200 . As described above, when the electrochromic device is implemented as an electrochromic mirror, the driving substrate 21300 may be arranged behind the reflective surface of the electrochromic element 22200. Alternatively, when the electrochromic element 22200 is implemented as an electrochromic window, the drive substrate 21310 may be arranged such that the drive substrate 21310 does not affect the path of light transmitted through the electrochromic element 22200.

In the compression/heating ( S21540 ), a process of compressing the driving module 21000 may be performed so that the driving module 21000 is fixed to the electrochromic element 22200 . The electrochromic module can be implemented by the drive module 21000 fixed to the electrochromic element 22200.

The process of compressing the driving module 21000 to fix the driving module 21000 may be performed. The direction of compression may be a direction orthogonal to the vertical direction of the electrochromic element 22200 .

The ACF arranged in the electrochromic element 22200 may be fixed due to the compression process.

Due to the compression process, the adhesive film of ACF can be inserted into the recesses included in the trench structure 22100 of the electrochromic element 22200. The adhesive film may be adhered to the exposed upper surface of the second electrode 22050 and the upper surface of the first electrode 22010 of the electrochromic element 22200 .

The conductors 21530 between the driving unit 21300 and the electrochromic element 22200 may be in contact with each other due to the compression process. In this way, conductive paths can be formed. The conductive path may be formed as a path in a direction corresponding to the compression direction.

The conductor 21530 included in the fixed ACF may allow the first electrode 22010 and the drive unit 21300 to be electrically connected, and the second electrode 22050 to be electrically connected to the drive unit 21300 due to the compression process. The conductor 21530 may be in contact with the first electrode 22010 and the connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 , and may be in contact with the second electrode 22050 and the connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 . Accordingly, the driving unit 21300 and the electrical connection member 21500 may be electrically connected to each other along the above-described conductive paths.

In addition to the compression treatment, a heating treatment of applying predetermined heat may be performed. Due to the heat treatment, the adhesive film can be more firmly fixed to the electrochromic element 22200 physically and chemically.

In packaging (S21550), the electrochromic module implemented in the above steps may be implemented as an electrochromic device. In packaging, a housing for protecting the electrochromic module from the external environment for implementation/design purposes can be coupled to the electrochromic module.

In the above-described process of the electrochromic device according to the embodiment of the present application, the steps in the embodiment are not necessary, and the process may optionally include the above-described steps. The steps are not necessarily performed in the order described above, and steps described later may also be performed before steps described first. Any one step can be repeated while another step is being performed.

Hereinafter, electrochromic treatment will be described.

Electrochromic devices according to embodiments of the present application may be electrochromic. Hereinafter, electrochromic of the electrochromic device will be described in detail.

53 is a flowchart illustrating an electrochromic method according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 53, the electrochromic method may include generating/transferring driving power (S21610), forming an effective voltage (S21620), and changing color (S21630). Although all of steps S21610 to S21630 may be performed, it is not necessary to perform all of steps S21610 to S21630 every time, and only one of steps S21610 to S21630 may be performed.

When the driving power is generated/transferred ( S21610 ), the driving power for driving the electrochromic element 22200 may be generated, and the generated driving power may be applied to the electrochromic element 22200 . The driving power formed in the above-described driving unit 21300 may be output to the electrical connection member 21500 , and the driving power applied to the electrical connection member 21500 may be transmitted to the electrode layer of the electrochromic element 22200 through the conductor 21530 .

Driving power may be generated from the above-described driving unit 21300. The driving power is power for discoloring the electrochromic element 22200 , and may have a voltage value or a current value for activating the electrochromic element 22200 .

The generated driving power may be conducted to the electrochromic element 22200 through the electrical connection member 21500 .

The electrochromic element 22200 according to the embodiment of the present application may receive driving power through the electrical connection member 21500 . The driving power may be transferred to the electrochromic element 22200 via a conductive path formed in the driving unit 21300 of the electrochromic element 22200 . As described above, conductive paths may be formed by conductors 21530 in contact with each other.

When the effective voltage is formed, an effective voltage that allows the electrochromic element 22200 to change color can be formed.

The effective voltage may be formed based on the driving power applied to the electrochromic element 22200 . The effective voltage may be formed based on a difference between the first driving power applied to the first electrode 22010 included in the electrochromic element 22200 and the second driving power applied to the second electrode 22050 included in the electrochromic element 22200 .

The effective voltage can be formed throughout the entire area of the electrochromic element 22200.

FIG. 54 is a graph showing effective voltages formed in electrochromic elements according to embodiments of the present application.

As shown in FIG. 54( a ), when the ACF is arranged in the region of the side surface of the electrochromic element 22200 , an effective voltage can be formed in one direction of the electrochromic element 22200 . The effective voltage may be an indicator of the amount of electrons supplied as a power source. That is, as the effective voltage is higher, the amount of electrons supplied to the electrochromic element 22200 can be increased.

Referring to Figure 54(b), the effective voltage developed throughout the entire area of the electrochromic element 22200 may be different for each area. The effective voltage may be different for each region due to the phenomenon of voltage drop induced in one direction. That is, the effective voltage can be formed in the electrochromic element 22200 such that the effective voltage has a continuously decreasing value in one direction of the electrochromic element 22200 .

Specifically, the effective voltage in the area where the side surfaces of the electrochromic elements 22200 of the electrical connection member 21500 are arranged may be the first effective voltage, and the effective voltage in the area adjacent to the above-mentioned area may be the second effective voltage . The second effective voltage may be a voltage lower than the first effective voltage.

Although the first effective voltage may be the difference between the first driving power and the second driving power, the effective voltage in the region adjacent to the above-mentioned region may be smaller than the difference between the first driving power and the second driving power value of .

In discoloration, the transmittance/absorption of the electrochromic element 22200 may vary. The color of the electrochromic element 22200 can be changed.

Based on the above-mentioned effective voltage, the electrochromic element 22200 can be electrochromic according to a predetermined electrochromic mechanism.

The electrochromic mechanism may include the steps of electrochromic ion migration, redox and color change.

In the migration of electrochromic ions, electrochromic ions for electrochromic may migrate in the electrochromic element 22200.

Electrochromic ions can migrate based on the above-described effective voltage. Electrochromic ions can migrate from regions of high potential (high voltage) to regions of low potential (low voltage) based on the effective voltage.

Due to the electrons provided to the electrochromic element 22200, electrochromic ions can migrate. When a predetermined Coulomb force is created between the electrons and the electrochromic ions, the electrochromic ions can migrate to regions of the electrochromic element 2220 to which electrons are provided.

In the redox reaction and discoloration, a redox reaction may occur in the electrochromic element 22200, and the electrochromic element 22200 may be discolored due to the redox reaction.

Redox and color changing reactions may occur in the electrochromic layer 22031 and/or the ion storage layer 22033 of the electrochromic element 22200.

The electrochromic ions may cause a redox reaction with a predetermined electrochromic material contained in the electrochromic layer 22031 and/or the ion storage layer 22033 of the electrochromic element 22200 .

55 is a diagram illustrating electrochromic according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 55, the optical state of the electrochromic element 22200 can be changed by the trench structure of the electrochromic element 22200.

Referring to Figure 55(a), electrochromism can occur from the electrical connection member in one direction or the other.

Coloration can occur inwardly from the trench structure. Discoloration can occur in the inner direction from the trench structure.

For each region of the electrochromic element 22200, the time required for the degree of coloration and/or transmittance to be uniform can be different. When the electrochromic element 22200 includes a first area and a second area, the transmittance of the first area is the first transmittance, and the transmittance of the second area is the second transmittance, the value of the first transmittance and the second transmittance The values of transmittance may take a predetermined period of time to become equal to each other. The first area may require a first period of time t1, and the second area may require a second period of time t2.

The period t can be defined as the threshold period during which the electrochromic element is uniformly discolored. The threshold period may be proportional to the voltage value. Therefore, the voltage may be applied for a longer period of time when the applied voltage value is relatively high, and may be applied for a short period of time when the applied voltage value is relatively low, to cause uniform discoloration of the electrochromic element.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), an electrical connection member may be arranged at each of the four side surfaces of the electrochromic element. Here, when the electrochromic element is colored, the coloring may proceed towards the center of the electrochromic element over time.

As described above, in the case of the electrochromic module including the electrochromic element 22200 in which the trench structure 22100 is formed and the electrical connection member having anisotropic conductivity, there is an effect of simplifying the arrangement of the driving module 21000 . The process of producing electrochromic modules can be simplified.

Driving power should be applied to the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 in order to drive the electrochromic element 22200.

When the trench structure 22100 is not formed, the electrochromic element 22200 should receive power from a different location. For example, the first electrode 22010 should receive driving power from the driving module 21000 arranged in the upward direction, and the second electrode 22050 should receive driving power from the driving module 21000 arranged in the downward direction. That is, when the trench structure 22100 is not formed, because the driving module 21000 has to be arranged at different positions of the electrochromic element 22200, the structure of the electrochromic module may become complicated. The processing may be complicated because additional processing should be performed to arrange the drive module 21000 at different positions of the electrochromic element 22200.

Alternatively, for the electrochromic element 22200 without the trench structure 22100 receiving power in the same direction, the electrochromic element 22200 should have electrodes with areas of different sizes. For example, the area of the second electrode 22050 may be wide, and the second electrode 22050 should be exposed in the outer direction of the first electrode 22010. Therefore, the areas of the first electrode 22010 and the exposed second electrode 22050 can receive power from the tip. When the areas of the electrodes included in the electrochromic element 22200 have different sizes, the electrodes cannot be formed with the same process. The process of forming the electrodes should be performed separately. Therefore, when the trench structure 22100 is not formed, the process for producing the electrochromic module may become complicated. Because one of the electrodes should have a larger area than the other, it may be difficult to reduce the size of an electrochromic module that includes electrochromic element 22200, where the electrodes have areas of different sizes. When the exposed area of the second electrode 22050 is not fully covered, the electrochromic element 22200 may be electrically unstable.

On the contrary, when the electrochromic element 22200 includes the trench structure 22100, the process of manufacturing the electrochromic module can be simplified, and the arrangement of the driving module 21000 can be simplified. The electrodes may be exposed in one direction in the electrochromic element 22200 having the trench structure 22100. Therefore, the driving module 21000 may be arranged at a position corresponding to the direction. Driving power can be applied to the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 of the electrochromic element 22200 by the driving module 21000 arranged in this direction. That is, since the driving module 21000 only needs to be arranged in one direction of the electrochromic element 22200, the arrangement of the driving module 21000 can be simplified. Therefore, the process of producing the electrochromic module can be simplified. In the electrochromic element 22200 including the trench structure 22100, since one electrode does not need to have a wider area than the other electrode, the size reduction of the electrochromic device can be facilitated. Since the electrodes exposed through the trench structure 22100 may be covered by the base of the electrical connection member, the electrochromic element 22200 may become electrically stable.

2.2 Right-angle buffer area

According to an embodiment of the present application, the buffer region 21100 may be formed in the electrochromic element 22200 . The buffer region 21100 may be defined as the region of the electrochromic element 22200 to which driving power is not applied.

Conductive paths may not be formed in regions corresponding to the buffer regions 21100 .

The conductors 21530 included in the electrical connection member 21500 for driving the electrochromic element 22200 may be conductive coated conductors 21540 . Similar to the insulating coated conductors 21545 described above, the electrically conductive coated conductors 21540 may be disposed in the electrochromic module or electrically connected to each configuration of the electrochromic module. Therefore, overlapping descriptions will be omitted. That is, the conductive coated conductors 21540 described above can be replaced with insulating coated conductors 21545, the conductive surface 21541 can be replaced with an insulating surface 21546, and the insulating interior 21542 can be replaced with a conductive interior 21547.

The plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 in the region of the base 21510 corresponding to the buffer region 21100 may not form a conductive path. The plurality of conductive coated conductors 21540 may be electrically insulating.

56 and 57 are diagrams illustrating a driving substrate for forming a buffer region according to an embodiment of the present application.

Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57 .

The angle between the first electrode of the electrochromic element and the connection surface 22170 may be a right angle. The angle between the second electrode of the electrochromic element and the connection surface 22170 may be a right angle. The conductors of the electrical connection member may be conductive coated conductors 21540.

Conductive paths may not be formed between the buffer region 21100 and the driving substrate 21310 .

The buffer region 21100 may be formed between the first electrode 22010 and the exposed second electrode 22050 of the trench structure 22100 of the electrochromic element. The buffer region 21100 may be formed between the protrusions 22130 and the recesses 22110 . The buffer region 21100 may be formed between the pad region 22140 and the contact region 22150 . The buffer region 21100 may be formed in a region corresponding to the connection surface or the recessed surface.

When the electrochromic element includes a first region, a second region and a third region, the first region may be the region of the first electrode, the second region may be the buffer region 21100, and the third region may be the region of the second electrode . The first area may be the pad area 22140, the third area may be the contact area 22150, and the second area may be the buffer area 21100. Here, the second region may be a partial region of the connecting surface or the recessed surface.

The buffer region 21100 may be implemented by the connection member 21330 included in the driving substrate 21310 . The buffer area 21100 may be implemented by adjusting the interval between the connection members 21330 or controlling the output of driving power from the connection members 21330 . The connection member 21330 may include a first connection member 21331 and a second connection member 21333 . The first connection member 21331 may be defined as the connection member 21330 formed at the position corresponding to the contact area 22150, and the second connection member 21333 may be defined as the connection member 21330 formed at the position corresponding to the pad area 22140.

Referring to FIG. 56 , the buffer region 21100 may be formed by not forming the connection member 21330 in a region of the driving substrate 21310 corresponding to the buffer region 21100 . The connection member 21330 may not be formed in a region of the driving substrate 21310 between the first connection member 21331 and the second connection member 21333 .

Alternatively, the interval between the connecting member 21330 and the connecting member 21330 adjacent thereto may be adjusted. When the interval between the connection members 21330 is adjusted, the connection members 21330 may not be formed in a region of the driving substrate 21310 corresponding to the buffer region 21100 . By spacing the connection members 21330 from each other, the connection members 21330 may not be formed at positions of the driving substrate 21310 corresponding to the buffer regions 21100 . In order to form the buffer region 21100, the interval between the first connection member 21331 and the second connection member 21333 may be adjusted.

The plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 in contact with the buffer region 21100 may not be in contact with the connection members 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 . The conductive surface 21541 of the conductive coating conductor 21540 may not be in contact with the connecting member 21330.

The buffer region 21100 may not be electrically connected to the driving substrate 21310 .

The buffer region 21100 may be insulated from the driving substrate 21310 .

Conductive paths may not be formed between the buffer region 21100 and the driving substrate 21310 . The plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 between the buffer region 21100 and the driving substrate 21310 may not form a conductive path. The plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 between the buffer region 21100 and the driving substrate 21310 may be in contact with the electrode layer or the intermediate layer, but not in contact with the connection members 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 . The conductive surfaces 21541 of the plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 may be in contact with the electrode layers or the connection surfaces, but not with the connection members 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 .

Referring to FIG. 57 , the buffer area 21100 may be implemented by controlling the driving power applied to the connection member 21330 at the position corresponding to the buffer area 21100 . The buffer region 21100 may be implemented by controlling the driving power applied to the connection member 21330 between the first connection member 21331 and the second connection member 21333. The connection member 21330 between the first connection member 21331 and the second connection member 21333 may be defined as a buffer connection member 21335.

The connection member 21330 may be controlled so that the connection member 21330 cannot output driving power. The output of the driving power of the connection member 21330 can be controlled by the driving unit 21300 . The driving unit 21300 may prevent the connection member 21330 from outputting driving power. The driving unit 21300 may prevent the connection member 21330 between the first connection member 21331 and the second connection member 21333 from outputting driving power. The buffer connection member 21335 may not be able to output driving power.

The output unit 21305 of the driving unit 21300 may not transmit the driving power to the connection member 21330 . The control unit 21307 may control the output unit 21305 so that the output unit 21305 cannot transmit the driving power to the connection member 21330.

When the driving power is output through the connection member 21330, the driving unit 21300 may prevent the driving power from being output. The control unit 21307 can stop outputting drive power. When the driving unit 21300 includes the feedback unit, the feedback unit may measure whether the driving power is output from the connection member 21330 . The feedback unit may measure whether driving power is applied to the buffer area 21100 . The feedback unit may transmit the measurement result to the control unit 21307. The control unit 21307 may control at least one of the generation unit 21303 and the output unit 21305 when it is determined to output or apply the driving power as the measurement result.

The buffer region 21100 may not be electrically connected to the driving substrate 21310 .

The buffer region 21100 may be insulated from the driving substrate 21310 .

Even when the plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 are in contact with the electrode layer and the driving substrate 21310, the plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 may not form a conductive path. The plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 and the connection member in contact with the electrode layer or the intermediate layer may not receive driving power. Even when the plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 are in contact with the connection members of the driving substrate 21310, the plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 may not receive driving power. The conductive surface 21541 of the conductive coated conductor 21540 that is in contact with the buffer connection member 21335 may not receive drive power.

Alternatively, the buffer region 21100 may be formed by insulating the driving unit 21300 from the connection member 21330 . The connection member 21330 may not be electrically connected to the driving unit 21300 . The buffer connection member 21335 may be insulated from the driving unit 21300 . The buffer connection member 21335 may not receive driving power from the driving unit 21300 . That is, insulation may be performed by physically blocking the electrical connection between the driving unit 21300 and the connection member 21330 .

58 and 59 are diagrams illustrating electrical connection members implemented to form buffer regions according to embodiments of the present application.

Referring to FIGS. 58 and 59 , the buffer region 21100 may be formed by controlling characteristics of a region of the electrical connection member corresponding to the buffer region 21100 . The properties may include the density of arrangement and electrical properties of the conductors. A region of the electrical connection member 21500 corresponding to the buffer region 21100 may be defined as a base buffer region 21513 . The base buffer area 21513 may be located between an area of the base 21510 corresponding to the first connecting member 21331 and an area of the base 21510 corresponding to the second connecting member 21333 .

Referring to FIG. 58 , the buffer region 21100 may be realized by adjusting the arrangement density of the conductive coating conductors 21540 of the base portion 21510 of the electrical connection member 21500 . The buffer region 21100 may be formed by making the arrangement density of the conductive coating conductors 21540 of the base buffer region 21513 different from the arrangement density of the region of the base 21510 .

The arrangement density of the conductive coated conductors 21540 may be lower or the conductive coated conductors 21540 may not be included in the base buffer region 21513. The arrangement density of the conductively coated conductors 21540 of the base buffer region 21513 may be lower than the arrangement density of the conductively coated conductors 21540 in regions of the base 21510 that are not the buffer region 21100 .

The plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 of the base buffer region 21513 may contact each other without forming a conductive path. Some of the plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 of the base buffer region 21513 may be in contact with the electrode layer or the intermediate layer and the driving substrate 21310, but do not form conductive paths. The conductive surfaces 21541 of the plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 of the base buffer region 21513 may be in contact with each other, but not in contact with the electrode layers, intermediate layers, or connecting members of the drive substrate 21310 .

The arrangement density of the conductive coated conductors 21540 can be adjusted during the process of producing the electrical connection member 21500.

Referring to FIG. 59, the buffer region 21100 may be formed by arranging a separate layer between one of the regions of the base region and the other. The area between the one area and the other area may be the base buffer area 21513 .

A separate layer may be an insulating layer.

A separate layer may be a layer that does not include the conductive coating conductor 21540.

Conductive paths may not be formed in the base buffer region 21513. The base buffer region 21513 may not include the plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 in contact with each other.

A plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 may be located in an area adjacent to the base buffer area 21513 . However, even when the plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 apply driving power to the insulating layer, a conductive path may not be formed in the base buffer region 21513. Even when the conductive surface 21541 of the conductive coated conductor 21540 is in contact with the insulating layer, the conductive path may not be formed. The driving power may not be transmitted to the base buffer area 21513 . When the base buffer region 21513 is a layer that does not include the conductive coating conductor 21540, the driving power cannot be transmitted to the base buffer region 21513.

Therefore, the buffer area 21100 may not receive driving power from the base buffer area 21513 .

The buffer region 21100 may also be formed by insulating a region of the electrical connection member 21500 corresponding to the buffer region 21100 from the driving substrate 21310 . The base buffer region 21513 may be insulated from the driving substrate 21310 .

A predetermined insulating material may be disposed between the base buffer region and the driving substrate 21310 .

A predetermined insulating layer may be disposed between the base buffer region 21513 and the driving substrate 21310 . The upper surface of the base buffer region 21513 may be insulating. An insulating material may be applied on the upper surface of the base buffer region 21513 . An insulating layer may be formed on the upper surface of the base buffer region 21513 . An insulating film may be attached to the upper surface of the base buffer region 21513 . The upper surface of the base buffer region 21513 may be coated and insulated.

Some conductors of the plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 of the base buffer region 21513 may be in contact with insulating material.

The base buffer region 21513 may not receive driving power from the driving substrate 21310 . The conductive coating conductors 21540 of the base buffer region 21513 may not receive driving power from the driving substrate 21310 .

FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating a conductive path according to an embodiment of the present application.

60 , when the buffer region 21100 is not formed, the plurality of conductive coating conductors 21540 in contact with the connection member 21330 for the pad region 22140 may contact the contact region 22150 and the pad region 22140 . Therefore, the power that should be applied to the pad area 22140 can be applied to the contact area 22150.

A short circuit phenomenon may occur in the electrochromic element 22200. On the contrary, when the buffer region 21100 is formed, a short circuit phenomenon in the pad region 22140 and the contact region 22150 can be prevented.

Although not shown, the trench structure 22100 may have a slope. When the trench structure 22100 has a slope, the plurality of conductors 21530 may be in contact with the connection surface 22170 or the recessed surface 22160 . Therefore, the electrochromic element 22200 may be damaged due to driving power being applied to the connection surface 22170 or the recessed surface 22160. In contrast, when the buffer region 21100 is formed, the direct application of the driving voltage to the connection surface 22170 or the recessed surface 22160 through the conductor 21530 can be prevented.

The sizes of the buffer area 21100 and the base buffer area 21513 shown in the drawings are only examples, and the sizes are not limited thereto.

2.3 Tilt buffer area

The trench structure 22100 of the electrochromic element 22200 according to the embodiment of the present application may have a predetermined slope.

61 is a diagram illustrating a trench structure with a slope of an electrochromic element according to an embodiment of the present application.

62 is a diagram illustrating an upper surface of a trench structure having a slope of an electrochromic element according to an embodiment of the present application.

63 is a diagram illustrating a side surface of a trench structure having a slope of an electrochromic element according to an embodiment of the present application.

Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 .

The trench structure having the slope may include a recessed surface 22160 and a connecting surface 22170 having a predetermined angle.

The connection surface 22170 and the recessed surface 22160 may have a predetermined angle with respect to each area of the electrochromic element 22200 .

The connection surface 22170 may have a first angle θ ₁ with the first electrode 22010 and a second angle θ ₂ with the second electrode 22050 .

The connecting surface 22170 and the concave surface 22160 may have a predetermined angle with respect to the upper surface of the protrusion 22130 or the upper surface of the pad region 22140 .

The above-described angles may be changed.

The above angles can be changed.

The predetermined angle between the connection surface 22170 and each area of the electrochromic element 22200 can be varied. The predetermined angle formed between the connection surface 22170 and the first electrode 22010 or the second electrode 22050 may be changed. The angle formed between the first electrode 22010 or the second electrode 22050 and each area of the connection surface 22170 may be changed. The angle of the first region of the connection surface 22170 may be the first angle θ ₁ , and the angle of the second region of the connection surface 22170 may be the second angle θ ₂ .

The angle formed between the recessed surface 22160 and each area of the electrochromic element 22200 can also be varied as with the connecting surface 22170 described above.

All areas of the electrochromic element 22200 included in the trench structure 22100 may be exposed in the upward direction.

The electrode layer and the intermediate layer 22030 included in the trench structure 22100 may be exposed in an upward direction.

The connection surface 22170 and the recessed surface 22160 may be exposed in an upward direction. First electrode 22010, electrochromic layer 22031, electrolyte layer 22032, and ion storage layer 22033 connecting surface 22170 and first electrode 22010, electrochromic layer 22031, electrolyte layer 22032, and ion storage layer 22033 included in recessed surface 22160 Can be exposed in the upward direction.

The second electrode 22050 may be exposed in an upward direction. The pad region 22140 of the second electrode 22050 may be exposed in an upward direction.

The electrical connection member 21500 may be arranged in the electrochromic element 22200 in which the trench structure 22100 having a predetermined slope is formed.

The electrical connection member 21500 may be in contact with the connection surface 22170 and the recessed surface 22160 of the electrochromic element 22200 .

The base 21510 of the electrical connection member 21500 may be in contact with the connection surface 22170 and the recessed surface 22160 .

Some of the conductors 21530 of the plurality of conductors 21530 included in the base 21510 may be in contact with the connection surface 22170 and the recessed surface 22160 . When the conductor 21530 is an insulating coated conductor 21545, the conductive interior 21547 and the insulating surface 21546 of the insulating coated conductor 21545 may be in contact with the connecting surface 22170 or the recessed surface 22160.

The connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 may be formed in a region corresponding to the connection surface 22170 and the recessed surface 22160 .

A predetermined conductive path may be formed between the driving substrate 21310 and the connection surface 22170 or the recessed surface 22160 .

The conductive path may be formed by a plurality of conductors 21530 arranged between the connection member 21330 and the connection surface 22170 . The conductive path may be formed by a plurality of conductors 21530 disposed between the connecting member 21330 and the recessed surface 22160.

Each layer of the electrochromic element 22200 included in the connection surface 22170 and the recessed surface 22160 can receive driving power through a conductive path.

When the trench structure 22100 of the electrochromic element 22200 has a predetermined slope, the electrochromic element may have a buffer region 21100 .

The buffer region 21100 may be defined as the region of the electrochromic element 22200 to which driving power is not applied.

The buffer region 21100 may be formed between the first electrode and the exposed second electrode in the trench structure of the electrochromic element. The buffer region 21100 may be formed between the protrusions and the recesses. The buffer region 21100 may be formed between the pad region 22140 and the contact region 22150 . The buffer region 21100 may be formed at a region corresponding to the connection surface or the recessed surface.

The above-described example for forming the buffer region 21100 of the electrochromic element 22200 in which the electrical connection member 21500 including the above-described electrically conductive coated conductor 21540 is disposed can also be applied to the electrochromic element 22200 having a predetermined slope. Therefore, overlapping descriptions will be omitted.

Hereinafter, the case where the conductor 21530 of the electrical connection member 21500 is the insulating-coated conductor 21545 will be described.

The buffer area 21100 may be formed by the driving substrate 21310 , the driving unit 21300 or the electrical connection member 21500 .

The buffer area 21100 may be formed by the connection member 21330 arranged in the driving substrate 21310 . The buffer region 21100 may be formed by appropriately implementing the connecting member 21330, controlling the output of driving power from the connecting member 21330, or a combination of both.

The conductive interior 21547 of the insulating coated conductor 21545 may be in contact with the buffer region 21100 while the insulating surface 21546 is in contact with the buffer region 21100 .

64 and 65 are diagrams illustrating a driving substrate 21310 implemented for forming a buffer region according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 64 , the buffer region 21100 may be formed by not forming the connection member 21330 in a region of the driving substrate 21310 corresponding to the buffer region 21100 . The connection member 21330 may not be formed in a region of the driving substrate 21310 between the first connection member 21331 and the second connection member 21333 .

Alternatively, the interval between the connecting member 21330 and the connecting member 21330 adjacent thereto may be adjusted. When the interval between the connection members 21330 is adjusted, the connection members 21330 may not be formed in a region of the driving substrate 21310 corresponding to the buffer region 21100 . In order to form the buffer region 21100, the interval between the first connection member 21331 and the second connection member 21333 may be adjusted.

The plurality of insulating coating conductors 21545 in contact with the buffer region 21100 may not be in contact with the connection members of the driving substrate 21310 .

The buffer area 21100 may not be electrically connected to the driving unit 21300 .

The buffer region 21100 may be insulated from the connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 .

The plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 at the upper surface of the buffer region 21100 may not form a conductive path. The insulating coating conductor 21545 may be in contact with an electrode layer or an intermediate layer included in the buffer region 21100 , but not in contact with the driving substrate 21310 . The buffer region 21100 may not receive drive power from the conductive interior 21547 of the insulating coated conductor 21545 in contact with the buffer region 21100 .

Even when the conductive interior 21547 of the insulating coated conductor 21545 is in contact with the buffer region 21100, the insulating coated conductor 21545 may not form a conductive path. The conductive inner portions 21547 of the insulating coated conductors 21545 that are in contact with each other may be in contact with the buffer region but not with the connection member 21330 .

Referring to FIG. 65 , the buffer area 21100 may be formed by controlling the connection member 21330 at a position corresponding to the buffer area 21100 . The buffer area 21100 may be formed by controlling the connection member 21330 between the first connection member 21331 and the second connection member 21333. The connection member 21330 between the first connection member 21331 and the second connection member 21333 may be defined as a buffer connection member 21335.

The connection member 21330 between the first connection member 21331 and the second connection member 21333 may be controlled so that the connection member 21330 cannot output driving power. The buffer connection member 21335 may not be able to output driving power.

The generating unit 21303 of the driving unit may not generate the driving power to be transmitted to the connection member 21330 . The control unit may control the generating unit 21303 so that the generating unit 21303 does not generate the driving power to be transmitted to the connection member 21330.

The output unit 21305 of the driving unit 21300 may not transmit the driving power to the connection member 21330 . The control unit may control the output unit 21305 so that the output unit 21305 does not transmit the driving power to the connection member 21330 .

When the driving power is output through the connection member 21330, the driving unit may prevent the driving power from being output. The control unit 21307 can stop outputting drive power. When the driving unit 21300 includes a feedback unit, the feedback unit may participate in the operation of the control unit 21307 .

The buffer region 21100 may not be electrically connected to the driving substrate 21310 .

The buffer region 21100 may be insulated from the driving substrate 21310 .

Even when the plurality of insulating coating conductors 21545 are in contact with the electrode layer and the driving substrate 21310, the plurality of insulating coating conductors 21545 may not form a conductive path. The plurality of insulating coating conductors 21545 and the connection member 21330 in contact with the electrode layer or the intermediate layer 22030 may not receive driving power.

The conductive interior 21547 of the insulating coated conductor 21545 in contact with the buffer connection member 21335 may not receive drive power.

66 and 67 are diagrams illustrating electrical connection members implemented to form buffer regions according to embodiments of the present application.

Referring to FIGS. 66 and 67 , the buffer region 21100 may be formed by appropriately adjusting a region of the electrical connection member 21500 corresponding to the buffer region 21100 . The area of the electrical connection member 21500 may be defined as the base buffer area 21513 described above.

The base buffer region 21513 may be implemented by adjusting the density of the arrangement of the insulating coated conductors 21545, adjusting the electrical properties of the insulating coated conductors 21545, or a combination of the two.

Referring to FIG. 66 , the buffer region 21100 may be realized by adjusting the arrangement density of the insulating coated conductors 21545 of the base 22510 of the electrical connection member 21500 .

The arrangement density of the insulating coated conductors 21545 may be lower or the insulating coated conductors 21545 may not be included in the base buffer region 21513.

The plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 of the base buffer region 21513 may contact each other, but do not form conductive paths. Some of the plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 of the base buffer region 21513 may be in contact with the electrode layer or the intermediate layer and the driving substrate 21310, but do not form conductive paths. The plurality of insulating coating conductors 21545 of the base buffer region 21513 may be in contact with each other, but not in contact with the electrode layer, the intermediate layer, or the connection member of the driving substrate 21310 .

Referring to FIG. 67, the buffer region 21100 may be formed by arranging a separate layer between one region and another region of the base region. The area between the one area and the other area may be the base buffer area 21513 .

A separate layer may be an insulating layer.

A separate layer may be a layer that does not include the insulating coated conductor 21545.

A plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 may be located in a region adjacent to the base buffer region 21513 . However, even when the plurality of insulating coating conductors 21545 apply driving power to a predetermined layer, a conductive path may not be formed in the base buffer region 21513.

The buffer region 21100 may also be formed by insulating a region of the electrical connection member 21500 corresponding to the buffer region 21100 from the driving substrate 21310 . The base buffer region 21513 may be insulated from the driving substrate 21310 .

A predetermined insulating material 1550 may be disposed between the base buffer region 21513 and the driving substrate 21310 .

A predetermined insulating layer may be disposed between the base buffer region 21513 and the driving substrate 21310 . The upper surface of the base buffer region 21513 may be insulating. An insulating material may be applied on the upper surface of the base buffer region 21513 . An insulating layer may be formed on the upper surface of the base buffer region 21513 . An insulating film may be attached to the upper surface of the base buffer region 21513 . The upper surface of the base buffer region 21513 may be coated and insulated.

Some of the plurality of insulating coated conductors 21545 of the base buffer region 21513 may be in contact with insulating material.

The base buffer region 21513 may not receive driving power from the driving substrate 21310 . The insulating coated conductors 21545 of the base buffer region 21513 may not receive driving power from the driving substrate 21310 .

68 is a diagram illustrating a conductive path according to an embodiment of the present application.

As shown in FIG. 68, when the buffer region 21100 is not formed, a conductive path may be formed through the conductive interior 21547 of the insulating coated conductor 21545 disposed between the connection surface and the connection member. The driving power may be applied to the intermediate layer 22030 via the conductive path and cause damage to the intermediate layer 22030 of the electrochromic element. Therefore, when the buffer region 21100 is formed, damage to the intermediate layer 22030 of the electrochromic element 22200 can be prevented.

The sizes of the buffer area 21100 and the base buffer area 21513 shown in the drawings are only examples, and the sizes are not limited thereto.

2.4 Assigning components

The electrochromic apparatus according to an embodiment of the present application may further include a dispensing member 21700 . The electrochromic module may further include a distribution member 2170 . The drive module 21000 may further include a dispensing member 21700 .

69 is a diagram illustrating a drive module further including a dispensing member according to an embodiment of the present application.

70 is a diagram illustrating a drive module further including a dispensing member according to an embodiment of the present application.

Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 .

The distribution member 21700 may electrically connect the driving substrate 21310 to the electrical connection member 21500 .

The dispensing member 21700 can include a base 21510 and a plurality of dispensing connecting members 21710.

The base 21510 can define the outer shape of the dispensing member 21700.

The distribution connection member 21710 may have electrical conductivity. The distribution connection member 21710 may be implemented using a conductive material.

The distribution connection member 21710 may be bent into a predetermined shape.

A plurality of distribution connection members 21710 may be arranged in the base portion 21510 at predetermined intervals.

The arrangement density of the distribution connection members 21710 at one side of the base 21510 may be different from the arrangement density of the distribution connection members 21710 at the other side of the base 21510 . The interval between adjacent distribution connection members 21710 arranged at one side of the base 21510 may be different from the interval between adjacent distribution connection members 21710 arranged at the other side of the base 21510 . For example, the distribution connection members 21710 may be arranged at a first interval on one side, the distribution connection members 21710 arranged on the side may extend in a curved shape towards the other side, and the distribution connection members 21710 may be arranged at the second interval on the other side layout. The first interval may be smaller than the second interval.

The distribution member 21700 may electrically connect the driving substrate 21310 to the electrical connection member 21500 . The distribution connection member 21710 of the distribution member 21700 may electrically connect the drive substrate 21310 to the electrical connection member 21500 . By distributing the connection member 21710, a conductive path can be formed between the driving substrate 21310 and the electrical connection member 21500.

The distribution member 21700 may be arranged to be in contact with the connection member 21330 of the drive substrate 21310 .

When the plurality of connection members 21330 are arranged on the lower surface of the driving substrate 21310 , the distribution members 21700 may be arranged on the lower surface of the driving substrate 21310 . The distribution connection member 21710 of the distribution member 21700 may be in contact with a plurality of connection members 21330 arranged on the lower surface of the driving substrate 21310 . In this case, the distribution connection members 21710 may be arranged on the lower and upper surfaces of the distribution member 21700. The distribution connection member 21710 arranged at the lower surface may be arranged at the upper surface via the through hole.

When the plurality of connection members 21330 are arranged on the upper surface of the driving substrate 21310 , the distribution members 21700 may be arranged on the upper surface of the driving substrate 21310 . The distribution connection member 21710 of the distribution member 21700 may be in contact with a plurality of connection members 21330 arranged on the upper surface of the driving substrate 21310 . In this case, the distribution connection member 21710 may be arranged only on the lower surface of the distribution member 21700 .

The plurality of distribution connection members 21710 of the distribution member 21700 may be connected to the plurality of connection members 21330 of the drive substrate 21310 . The plurality of distribution connection members 21710 may include a first distribution connection member 21711 and a second distribution connection member 21713. The plurality of connection members 21330 may include a first connection member 21331 and a second connection member 21333 disposed near the first connection member 21331 .

The plurality of distribution connection members 21710 may correspond to the plurality of connection members 21330 .

The interval between the distribution connection members 21710 adjacent to each other may correspond to the interval between the connection members 21330 adjacent to each other. The number of distribution connection members 21710 may be equal to the number of connection members 21330 .

The first distribution connection member 21711 may be connected to the first connection member 21331 , and the second distribution connection member 21713 may be connected to the second connection member 21333 .

The distribution connection member 21710 may not correspond to the plurality of connection members 21330 .

The interval between the distribution connection members 21710 adjacent to each other may not correspond to the interval between the connection members 21330 adjacent to each other. The number of distribution connection members 21710 may be different from the number of connection members 21330 .

The first distribution connection member 21711 may be connected to the first connection member 21331 , and the second distribution connection member 21713 may be connected to another connection member 21330 adjacent to the second connection member 21333 .

Since the distribution connection member 21710 is in contact with the connection member 21330, the distribution connection member 21710 may be electrically connected to the connection member 21330. The distribution member 21700 may be electrically connected to the driving unit 21300 .

The distribution member 21700 may be electrically connected to the electrical connection member 21500 .

The distribution member 21700 may be arranged on the upper surface of the electrical connection member 21500 . The distribution member 21700 may be in contact with the upper surface of the electrical connection member 21500 . The base 21510 of the distribution member 21700 may be in contact with the upper surface of the electrical connection member 21500 .

The distribution member 21700 may cover the upper surface of the electrical connection member 21500 . The base 21510 of the electrical connection member 21500 may be covered by the distribution member 21700 .

The distribution connection member 21710 of the distribution member 21700 may be in contact with the upper surface of the electrical connection member 21500.

A plurality of distribution connection members 21710 may be in contact with the base portion 21510 of the electrical connection member 21500 . The dispensing connection member 21710 may be in contact with the upper surface of the base 21510.

The plurality of distribution connection members 21710 may be in contact with some of the conductors 21530 of the plurality of conductors 21530 of the electrical connection member 21500 .

Therefore, the electrical connection member 21500 may have a conductive path. The conductors 21530 in contact with the distribution connection members 21710 may receive drive power. Conductor 21530 may receive drive power from distribution connection member 21710 .

Since the distribution member 21700 is electrically connected to the driving substrate 21310 and the electrical connection member 21500 as described above, the electrochromic element 22200 can receive driving power from the driving substrate 21310.

71 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic module further including a dispensing member according to an embodiment of the present application.

As shown in FIG. 71 , the distribution member 21700 may be arranged between the driving substrate 21310 and the electrical connection member 21500 arranged at the side surface of the electrochromic element 22200 .

A plurality of conductors 21530 connected to the distribution connection member 21710 may be in contact with the electrochromic element 22200.

The plurality of conductors 21530 connected to the distribution connection member 21710 may be in contact with regions of the second electrode 22050 and regions of the first electrode 22010 of the trench structure 22100 . Conductor 21530 may be in contact with pad area 22140 and contact area 22150 .

A conductive path may be formed between the electrochromic element 22200 and the dispensing member 21700. Conductive paths may be formed between upper regions of the first electrodes 22010 and upper regions of the second electrodes 22050 and the distribution connection member 21710 . Conductive paths may be formed between the pad area 22140 and the distribution connection member 21710 and between the contact area 22150 and the distribution connection member 21710 .

Therefore, the first electrode 22010 and the second electrode 22050 of the electrochromic element 22200 can receive driving power. The electrochromic element 22200 may be electrochromic due to receiving drive power from the distribution member.

When the distribution member 21700 is present, there is an effect of simplifying the arrangement of the drive module 21000. When the distribution member 21700 is not present, the size of the connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 should correspond to the size of the electrical connection member 21500 to apply the driving power to the entire area of the electrical connection member 21500 . However, when the distribution member 21700 is present, the size of the connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 may be formed to be smaller than that of the electrical connection member 21500 . When the distribution member 21700 is present, the arrangement of the driving substrate 21310 can become effective because the size of the connection member 21330 can be formed smaller than the size of the electrical connection member 21500 . Therefore, when the distribution member 21700 is present, there is an effect of simplifying the arrangement of the driving module 21000 .

Although the distribution member 21700 has been described above as being disposed separately from the drive module 21000, the distribution member 21700 may also be included in the electrical connection member 21500. For example, the dispensing member 21700 may be disposed on the upper surface of the base 21510.

2.5 Electrical Connector

The electrochromic element 22200 according to an embodiment of the present application may have a predetermined outer shape.

72 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic element 22200 according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 72( a ), the electrochromic element 22200 may be provided in the shape of a flat plate having a predetermined curvature. The electrochromic element 22200 may be provided in the shape of an oval flat plate. The side surfaces of the electrochromic element 22200 may have a predetermined curvature. The outermost portion of the electrochromic element 22200 may have curvature.

Referring to FIG. 72(b), the electrochromic element 22200 may be provided in a trapezoidal plate shape. The side surface of the electrochromic element 22200 may include an upper side, a lower side, and a side connecting the upper side and the lower side. The longitudinal length of the upper side may be different from the longitudinal length of the lower side.

The trench structure 22100 according to the embodiment of the present application may be formed corresponding to the outer shape of the electrochromic element 22200 .

When the electrochromic element 22200 has a predetermined curvature, the trench structure 22100 of the electrochromic element 22200 may have a predetermined curvature. A region of the electrochromic element 22200 included in the trench structure 22100 may have a predetermined curvature. The pad regions 22140 and the protrusions 22130 may have predetermined curvatures.

When the electrochromic element 22200 is disposed in a trapezoidal flat plate shape, the trench structure 22100 may be formed only on the upper and lower sides of the electrochromic element 22200 .

When the number of trench structures 22100 formed on the upper side and the lower side is equal, the intervals between adjacent trench structures 22100 may be different. The interval between the trench structures 22100 formed on the upper side may be different from the interval between the trench structures 22100 formed on the lower side. The interval between the mutually adjacent depressions 22110 and the interval between the projections 22130 formed on the upper side may be the same as the interval between the mutually adjacent depressions 22110 and the mutually adjacent projections 22130 formed on the lower side. The intervals are different. The length of the side surface of the protrusion 22130 on the upper side may be different from the length of the side surface of the protrusion 22130 on the lower side.

When the number of trench structures 22100 formed on the upper side and the lower side is different, the interval between the trench structures 22100 of the electrochromic element may be the same. The number of trench structures 22100 may be determined such that the intervals between the trench structures 22100 are the same.

The electrochromic element 22200 formed in the shape of a trapezoidal flat plate may have the groove structure 22100 on the upper side, the lower side and one side. Compared with the electrochromic element 22200 in which the trench structure 22100 is not formed on one side, the electrochromic element 22200 having the trench structure 22100 formed on one side can have an effect of shortening the electrochromic period. When the trench structure 22100 is arranged on one side, the area where the driving power is applied may be widened compared to when the trench structure 22100 is not formed on one side. By receiving the driving power in a wider area, there is an effect of shortening the electrochromic period.

The electrochromic module including the electrochromic element 22200 having a predetermined shape may further include a predetermined electrical connector 23000 .

73 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic element and a driving module having a predetermined shape according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 73 , the driving substrate 21310 may be arranged only at a partial area of the upper surface of the electrical connection member 21500 . The connection member 21330 of the driving substrate 21310 may only be in contact with a partial area of the upper surface of the electrical connection member 21500 . The connection member 21330 may only be in contact with a partial area of the base 21510 .

A partial area of the electrical connection member 21500 may receive driving power from the driving substrate 21310 . A partial area of the base 21510 may receive driving power through the connection member 21330 .

Therefore, the driving power may be applied only to a partial area of the electrochromic element 22200 .

The electrochromic module may include a predetermined electrical connector 23000 so that driving power is applied to the entire area of the electrical connection member 21500 . The driving power applied to the partial area may be transmitted to other areas through the predetermined electrical connector 23000 .

The electrochromic module may include the electrical connector 23000 so that the driving power applied to only some areas is transmitted to other areas.

The electrical connector 23000 may be implemented using at least one of predetermined wires and conductive films.

The electrical connector 23000 may be connected to the driving substrate 21310 . The electrical connector 23000 connected to the connection member 21330 may be in contact with other regions of the electrical connection member 21500 .

Alternatively, the electrical connector 23000 may be connected to a partial area of the electrical connection member 21500 . The electrical connector 23000 connected to a partial area may be in contact with other areas of the electrical connection member 21500.

Alternatively, when there are a plurality of electrical connection members 21500, the electrical connector 23000 may electrically connect the plurality of electrical connection members 21500. The electrochromic module may include predetermined electrical connectors 23000 such that driving power is applied to all electrical connection members 21500.

The driving power transmitted to some of the electrical connection members 21500 may be transmitted to other electrical connection members 21500 through the electrical connector 23000 .

Alternatively, when there are multiple distribution members 21700, the electrical connector 23000 may electrically connect the multiple distribution members 21700.

The electrochromic element may have a curved shape.

The above-described driving module 21000 can drive the electrochromic element 10200 of FIGS. 1 to 37 . That is, the electrical connection member 21500 of the above-described driving module 21000 may be arranged in the electrochromic element 10200 of FIGS. 1 to 37 , and a trench structure 22100 may be formed in the electrochromic element 10200 of FIGS. 1 to 37 to Drive power is received from the electrical connection member 21500 .

<Second Example Group>

Hereinafter, another embodiment of the above-described electrochromic element will be described.

In the following, the "optical state" of a configuration may be defined as meaning encompassing the properties of the configuration related to light. The optical state may include refractive index, transmittance (transmittance), color efficiency, optical density, color index, discoloration/decolorization state, and the like.

Hereinafter, "change in optical state" may refer to the above-mentioned change in optical state. However, hereinafter, the change in the optical state refers to the change in the discoloration/decolorization state unless otherwise mentioned.

In the following, "distinguishing" may refer to visual distinguishing. When distinguishing one configuration from another, the configuration can be visually distinguished from other configurations. In other words, when differentiating the configuration from other configurations, the configuration and other configurations can be regarded as different configurations.

Hereinafter, the electrochromic element according to the second embodiment group will be described.

1. Electrochromic element

The optical state of the electrochromic element can be changed as a result of receiving electrical power. Power may include current, voltage, and the like.

FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating an electrochromic element 30001 according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 74 , an electrochromic element 30001 according to an embodiment of the present application includes a first electrode 30100, an electrochromic layer 30300, an ion transport storage layer 30500, and a second electrode 30700, and a first contact surface 30200, a boundary surface 30400, and a first contact surface 30200. Two contact surfaces 30600 may be formed in the electrochromic element 30001. However, the electrochromic element 30001 is not limited to having the elements shown in FIG. 74 , and the electrochromic element 30001 including more elements than those shown in FIG. 74 may also be implemented. For example, the electrochromic element 30001 may further comprise a power unit configured to apply power for changing the optical state of the electrochromic element 30001.

The first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 may be arranged to face each other.

The electrochromic layer 30300 may be located between the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700.

The ion transport storage layer 30500 may be disposed between the electrochromic layer 30300 and the second electrode 30700.

The first contact surface 30200 may be formed of the first electrode 30100 and the electrochromic layer 30300 in contact with each other.

The boundary surface 30400 may be formed of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 in contact with each other.

The second contact surface 30600 may be formed of the ion transport storage layer 30500 and the second electrode 30700 in contact with each other.

Hereinafter, each layer of the electrochromic element 30001 will be described in detail.

First, the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 will be described.

The first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 may have predetermined shapes. The first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 may be provided in a flat plate shape.

The first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 may include at least one of a light-transmitting material and a light-reflecting material. The material can be conductive.

A light transmissive material is a material that has the optical property of transmitting most of the light applied to it. A metal doped with at least one of indium, tin, zinc and/or oxide may be selected as the light-transmitting material. Specifically, indium tin oxide (ITO) or zinc oxide (ZnO) may be selected as the light-transmitting material.

A light reflective material is a material that has the optical property of reflecting most of the light applied to it. The light reflecting material may be a material including at least one of Al, Cu, Mo, Cr, Ti, Au, Ag, and W.

The first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 may be implemented with appropriate materials according to the purpose of realizing the electrochromic element 30001.

When both the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 are implemented with a light-transmitting material, light applied to the electrochromic element 30001 can pass through the electrochromic element 30001 . In this case, the electrochromic element 30001 can be used as an electrochromic window.

When the first electrode 30100 is realized with a light-reflecting material and the second electrode 30700 is realized with a light-transmitting material, or when the first electrode 30100 is realized with a light-transmitting material and the second electrode 30700 is realized with a light-reflecting material, it is possible to change from electrochromic Element 30001 reflects light applied to electrochromic element 30001 . In this case, the electrochromic element 30001 can function as an electrochromic mirror.

The particle size of the first electrode 30100 may be larger than that of the second electrode 30700 . The first electrode 30100 may be composed of particles larger in size than the particles constituting the second electrode 30700 .

The particles constituting the first electrode 30100 may have a larger size than the particles constituting the second electrode 30700 due to different temperature conditions in the process of forming the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 .

The particle size of the first electrode 30100 and the particle size of the second electrode 30700 may be inversely proportional to the temperature during the process of forming the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 . The particle size in the low temperature process may be relatively larger than the particle size in the high temperature process.

In order to realize the electrochromic element 30001, the second electrode 30700 may be formed and provided separately from the first electrode 30100, the electrochromic layer 30300, and the ion transport storage layer 30500. The process for forming the second electrode 30700 may be performed at a high temperature.

In order to realize the electrochromic element 30001, the first electrode 30100 may be formed under the same processing conditions as the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500. The process for forming the first electrode 30100 may be performed at a relatively lower temperature than the temperature at which the second electrode 30700 is formed.

The size of the particles constituting the first electrode 30100 may be larger than the size of the particles constituting the second electrode 30700 due to the temperature conditions of the process.

The low temperature conditions when forming the first electrode 30100 can prevent damage to the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 during the process for forming the electrochromic element 30001 . When the first electrode 30100 is formed under a high temperature condition, the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 formed under the same processing conditions as the first electrode 30100 may be exposed to a high temperature environment. Because the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be deteriorated under high temperature conditions, the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be damaged due to a high temperature processing environment. In contrast, when the first electrode 30100 is formed under a low temperature condition, the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 can be prevented from being damaged due to deterioration. Therefore, destruction of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 can be prevented in the process of forming the electrochromic element 30001 .

The first electrode 30100 may have a smaller resistance value than the second electrode 30700 . The resistance values of the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 may be based on the size of particles constituting the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 . The resistance value may be inversely proportional to the size of particles constituting the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 . Therefore, since the size of the particles constituting the first electrode 30100 is larger than that of the particles constituting the second electrode 30700 , the first electrode 30100 may have a lower resistance value than the second electrode 30700 .

It has been described above that the size of the particles constituting the first electrode 30100 is larger than the size of the particles constituting the second electrode 30700 . However, on the contrary, the size of the particles constituting the second electrode 30700 may be larger than the size of the particles constituting the first electrode 30100 . In this case, the second electrode 30700 may be formed together with the ion transport storage layer 30500 and the electrochromic layer 30300, and the first electrode 30100 may be formed separately. The second electrode 30700 may be formed at a higher temperature than the temperature conditions of the process for forming the first electrode 30100 . The second electrode 30700 may have a smaller resistance value than the first electrode 30100 .

Hereinafter, the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 will be described.

The electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be disposed between the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700.

The electrochromic layer 30300 may be disposed between the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700. The electrochromic layer 30300 may be arranged in contact with the lower surface of the first electrode 30100 . The electrochromic layer 30300 may be arranged to be spaced apart from the second electrode 30700 in an upward direction.

The ion transport storage layer 30500 may be disposed between the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700. The ion transport storage layer 30500 may be disposed between the electrochromic layer 30300 and the second electrode 30700. The ion transport storage layer 30500 may be arranged in contact with the lower surface of the electrochromic layer 30300 . The ion transport storage layer 30500 may be arranged in contact with the upper surface of the second electrode 30700 .

The optical state of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 can be changed. The electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be electrochromic/decolorized. The change in optical state and electrochromism can be caused by the power applied to the electrochromic element 30001 .

The electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 may include electrochromic materials for changing the optical state.

Electrochromic materials may include redox materials and chromic ions. Electrochromic materials can be defined as materials whose optical properties are variable.

Redox materials may include redox materials such as TiO2, V2O5, Nb2O5, Cr2O3, MnO2, FeO2, CoO2, NiO2, RhO2, Ta2O5, and WO3, as well as reductive color-changing materials such as NiO2, IrO2, CoO2, iridium-magnesium oxide, nickel-magnesium Oxidation-chromic materials of oxides and titanium-vanadium oxides.

Chromium ions can be defined as materials that cause changes in the optical properties of electrochromic materials. Chromium ions may include cathode ions such as OH- and anode ions such as H+ and Li+.

The electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 may receive electrons. The electrochromic layer 30300 may receive electrons from the first electrode 30100 . The ion transport storage layer 30500 may receive electrons from the second electrode 30700 . Alternatively, the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 may directly receive electrons from the power supply unit. Electrons can cause the migration of chromium ions. Chromium ions may be guided by electrons provided to the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 and provided to the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 .

The ion transport storage layer 30500 may further include an insulating material. The ion transport storage layer 30500 may block migration of electrons based on an insulating material.

Insulating materials can include SiO2, Al2O3, Nb2O3, Ta2O5, LiTaO3, LiNbO3, SiO2, Al2O3, Nb2O3, Ta2O5, LiTaO3, LiNbO3, La2TiO7, La2TiO7, SrZrO3, ZrO2, Y2O3, Nb2O5, La2Ti2O7, LaTiO3, HfO2, La2TiO7, La2TiO7, At least one of SrZrO3, ZrO2, Y2O3, Nb2O5, La2Ti2O7, LaTiO3 and HfO2.

The electrochromic element 30001 can be implemented without being limited to the above-described order of arrangement of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500. Specifically, the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be arranged on the lower surface of the first electrode 30100, and the electrochromic layer 30300 may be arranged between the ion transport storage layer 30500 and the second electrode 30700.

Each element of the electrochromic element 30001 has been described above in detail.

Hereinafter, the change in the optical state of the electrochromic element 30001 will be described.

FIG. 75 is a graph showing a change in the optical state of the electrochromic element 30001 according to the embodiment of the present application.

Hereinafter, changes in the optical state of the electrochromic element will be described with reference to (a) to (c) of FIG. 75 .

Referring to (a) to (c) of FIG. 75 , the optical state of the electrochromic element may be changed due to the migration of electrons and the migration of electrochromic ions.

The electrochromic element can exchange electrons with the power supply unit. The power supply unit may be a power generator configured to generate predetermined power, a control unit configured to generate a change for controlling the optical state of the electrochromic element 30001, and a power application line extending from the power generator or the control unit at least one of the.

The first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 may exchange electrons with the power supply unit.

When the first electrode 30100 receives electrons from the power supply unit, the electrons may migrate from the second electrode 30700 to the power supply unit. Alternatively, when electrons migrate from the first electrode 30100 to the power supply unit, the second electrode 30700 may receive electrons from the power supply unit.

Hereinafter, for convenience of description, a description will be given by assuming that the first electrode 30100 receives electrons and the electrons migrate from the second electrode 30700 .

Electrons supplied to the first electrode 30100 may migrate along the first electrode 30100 . Electrons can also migrate along the second electrode 30700. Electrons may migrate in a lateral direction along the first electrode 30100 or the second electrode 30700 .

In each region of the first electrode 30100, an electrochromic layer to which electrons migrated along the first electrode 30100 can be transported. Corresponding to this, electrons may be transported from the ion transport storage layer 30500 to each region of the second electrode 30700 .

The electrons transported to the electrochromic layer 30300 can guide electrochromic ions.

The electrons transported to the electrochromic layer 30300 may guide electrochromic ions contained in the electrochromic layer 30300 or the ion transport storage layer 30500 and allow the electrochromic ions to migrate to the electrochromic layer 30300 .

Corresponding to this, the electrochromic ions contained in the ion transport storage layer 30500 can be transported from the ion transport storage layer 30500 to the electrochromic layer 30300 .

The electrochromic layer 30300 can be electrochromic due to the migrated electrons and electrochromic ions. The reductive color-changing material contained in the electrochromic layer 30300 may be reduced and discolored due to migrated electrons and electrochromic ions.

Corresponding to this, the ion transport storage layer 30500 may also be electrochromic. As the electrochromic ions and electrons contained in the ion transport storage layer 30500 migrate, the oxidochromic material in the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be oxidized. When the oxidative color changing material is oxidized, the ion transport storage layer 30500 may change color.

Due to the migration of electrons, a potential may be formed in each region of the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode. The potential in each region can be determined based on the number of electrons present in that region.

A potential difference may be formed between the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 . The potential difference may be a value corresponding to a difference between the potential of the first electrode 30100 and the potential of the second electrode 30700 . Since the potential may be determined based on the number of electrons, the potential difference may be a value corresponding to the difference between the number of electrons present in the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 .

The degree of electrochromism of the electrochromic element can be adjusted based on the potential and the potential difference. The potential and the potential difference are values related to the number of electrons supplied to the electrochromic element 30001 . Therefore, by adjusting the potential and the potential difference, the amount of electrons supplied to and migrated from the electrochromic element can be adjusted. Since electrochromic ions migrate according to the number of electrons and cause electrochromism according to the number of electrons, the degree of electrochromism of the electrochromic element 30001 can be adjusted according to the control potential and the potential difference.

The electrochromic element 30001 can be implemented without being limited to the above-described arrangement order of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 . Specifically, the terms "first" and "second" are used here only to distinguish one element from another, and the first electrode 30100 may be the second electrode 30700 and the second electrode 30700 may be the first electrode 30100 . Accordingly, the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be arranged on the lower surface of the first electrode 30100, and the electrochromic layer 30300 may be arranged between the ion transport storage layer 30500 and the second electrode 30700. In this case, the ion transport storage layer 30500 may exchange electrons with the first electrode 30100, and the electrochromic layer 30300 may exchange electrons with the second electrode 30700.

The change in the optical state of the electrochromic element 30001 has been described above.

Hereinafter, the internal structure of the electrochromic element 30001 will be described.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the electrochromic element 30001 according to the embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 76 , the electrochromic element 30001 may have an internal structure including a first contact surface 30200 , a boundary surface 30400 and a second contact surface 30600 .

The first contact surface 30200, the boundary surface 30400, and the second contact surface 30600 may be defined as contact surfaces formed due to the layers of the electrochromic element 30001 being in contact with each other.

The internal structure may be one in which the physical structure of the electrochromic element 30001 is continuous and discontinuous. The physical structure may have a predetermined outer shape and constitute the electrochromic element 30001 .

Hereinafter, the first contact surface 30200, the boundary surface 30400, and the second contact surface 30600 will be described in detail.

First, the first contact surface 30200, the boundary surface 30400, and the second contact surface 30600 will be described.

The first contact surface 30200 may be a surface formed by the first electrode 30100 and the electrochromic layer 30300 contacting each other. The first electrode 30100 and the electrochromic layer 30300 may be in contact with each other. The lower surface of the first electrode 30100 and the upper surface of the electrochromic layer 30300 may be the same surface. The first contact surface 30200 may be a contact surface between the first electrode 30100 and the electrochromic layer 30300 . In other words, the first contact surface 30200 may be the lower surface of the first electrode 30100 . Alternatively, the first contact surface 30200 may be the upper surface of the electrochromic layer 30300 .

The second contact surface 30600 may be a surface formed by the ion transport storage layer 30500 and the second electrode 30700 being in contact with each other. The ion transport storage layer 30500 and the second electrode 30700 may be in contact with each other. The lower surface of the ion transport storage layer 30500 and the upper surface of the second electrode 30700 may be the same surface. The second contact surface 30600 may be a contact surface between the ion transport storage layer 30500 and the second electrode 30700 . In other words, the second contact surface 30600 may be the lower surface of the ion transport storage layer 30500 . Alternatively, the second contact surface 30600 may be the upper surface of the second electrode 30700 .

The boundary surface 30400 may be formed by the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 being in contact with each other. The electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be in contact with each other. The lower surface of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the upper surface of the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be the same surface. The boundary surface 30400 may be the contact surface between the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500. In other words, the boundary surface 30400 may be the lower surface of the electrochromic layer 30300 . Alternatively, the boundary surface 30400 may be the upper surface of the ion transport storage layer 30500 .

The boundary surface 30400 may allow the electrochromic layer 30300 to be distinguished from the ion transport storage layer 30500. Each element of electrochromic element 30001 can be visually distinguished by boundary surface 30400 . The electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 can be visually distinguished by the boundary surface 30400 .

The boundary surface 30400 may extend in a predetermined direction. The boundary surface 30400 may extend in a lateral direction. The boundary surface 30400 may extend in a direction parallel to the first contact surface 30200 and the second contact surface 30600 .

A first imaginary line 30901 and a second imaginary line 30903 may be provided in the electrochromic element 30001 .

The first imaginary line 30901 and the second imaginary line 30903 may be some of a plurality of arbitrary imaginary lines that may be provided in the electrochromic element.

The first imaginary line 30901 and the second imaginary line 30903 may be provided in different layers of the electrochromic element 30001 .

The first imaginary line 30901 may be an imaginary line disposed in the electrochromic layer 30300 . The first imaginary line 30901 may be an imaginary line that can be arbitrarily arranged among imaginary lines in the electrochromic layer 30300 .

The second imaginary line 30903 may be an imaginary line provided in the ion transport storage layer 30500 . The second imaginary line 30903 may be an imaginary line that can be arbitrarily provided among imaginary lines in the ion transport storage layer 30500 .

The first imaginary line 30901 and the second imaginary line 30903 may be provided at various positions in the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 . The positions of the first imaginary line 30901 and the second imaginary line 30903 are not limited to those shown in the drawings and may be set at various positions.

Alternatively, the first imaginary line 30901 and the second imaginary line 30903 may be selected from any one of arbitrary imaginary lines provided in the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 .

The first imaginary line 30901 and the second imaginary line 30903 may be set to have various lengths.

The first imaginary line 30901 and the second imaginary line 30903 may be set to have a length shorter than the longitudinal length of the layer of the electrochromic element 30001 . Alternatively, the first imaginary line 30901 and the second imaginary line 30903 may be arranged to have lengths corresponding to the longitudinal lengths of the elements of the electrochromic element 30001 .

The first imaginary line 30901 and the second imaginary line 30903 may be arranged to extend in the lateral direction.

The first imaginary line 30901 and the second imaginary line 30903 may be arranged to extend in a direction parallel to at least one of the first contact surface 30200 , the boundary surface 30400 and the second contact surface 30600 .

Alternatively, the first imaginary line 30901 and the second imaginary line 30903 may be imaginary lines selected from a plurality of imaginary lines that can be arbitrarily set, which are in the lateral direction or parallel to the first contact surface 30200, the boundary surface 30400 and the second contact Extend in the direction of at least one of the surfaces 30600 .

Hereinafter, the internal structure of the electrochromic element 30001 will be described.

The physical structure of the elements of the electrochromic element 30001 may be continuous while the physical structures of the elements are discontinuous from each other. The physical structure of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the physical structure of the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be continuous, while the physical structure of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the physical structure of the ion transport storage layer 30500 are discontinuous from each other.

The physical structure of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the physical structure of the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be continuous with respect to the imaginary line. Continuity can be defined as when the physical structure is divided into one area and another by an imaginary line, the physical structure in one area and the physical structure in the other area are continuous.

The physical structure of the electrochromic layer 30300 may be continuous with respect to the first imaginary line 30901 , and the physical structure of the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be continuous with respect to the second imaginary line 30903 .

The first imaginary line 30901 may be disposed in the electrochromic layer 30300 . The first imaginary line 30901 may be a collection of imaginary lines such that the physical structure of the electrochromic layer 30300 is continuous with respect to the first imaginary line 30901 . The physical structure of the electrochromic layer 30300 with respect to which the first imaginary line 30901 may be continuous may be selected from any imaginary line that may be provided in the electrochromic layer 30300 .

The second imaginary line 30903 may be disposed in the ion transport storage layer 30500. The second imaginary line 30903 may be a collection of imaginary lines such that the physical structure of the ion transport storage layer 30500 is continuous with respect to the second imaginary line 30903 . The second imaginary line 30903 with respect to which the physical structure of the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be continuous may be selected from any imaginary line that may be provided in the ion transport storage layer 30500.

The area of the electrochromic layer 30300 may be divided by a first imaginary line 30901 , and the area of the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be divided by a second imaginary line 30903 .

The area of the electrochromic layer 30300 may be divided into a first discoloration area 30301 and a second discoloration area 30303 by a first imaginary line 30901 , and the area of the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be divided into a first ion area 30501 by a second imaginary line 30903 and the second ion region 30503. The first color changing region 30301 may be adjacent to the first electrode 30100 , and the second color changing region 30303 may be adjacent to the ion transport storage layer 30500 . The first ion region 30501 may be adjacent to the electrochromic layer 30300 , and the second ion region 30503 may be adjacent to the second electrode 30700 .

The physical structure of the first color changing area 30301 and the physical structure of the second color changing area 30303 may be continuous with respect to the first imaginary line 30901 . The physical structure of the first ion region 30501 and the physical structure of the second ion region 30503 may be continuous with respect to the second imaginary line 30903 .

Since each of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 is continuous, there is an effect of improving the uniformity of electrochromic. When each of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 is discontinuous, the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 may have difficulty transporting received electrons or electrochromic ions to the entire area of the layer. In contrast, because each of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 is continuous, the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 can receive electrons or electrochromic ions and transfer electrons or electrochromic ions The ions are transported to the entire area of the layer. Therefore, the optical state can be changed in the entire area of each of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500.

The first color changing area 30301 and the second color changing area 30303 are not actually separated from each other, but actually constitute a single area, and are only areas defined by arbitrarily dividing the area of the electrochromic layer 30300 by the first imaginary line 30901 . Also, in fact, the first ion region 30501 and the second ion region 30503 constitute a single region.

The electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be discontinuous from each other with respect to the boundary surface 30400 . The discontinuity of one element and another element with respect to the boundary surface 30400 may mean that the element and the other element are distinguished by the boundary surface 30400 .

The physical structure of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the physical structure of the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be discontinuous from each other with respect to the boundary surface 30400 . The physical structure of the second color changing region 30303 and the physical structure of the second ion region 30503 may be discontinuous with respect to the boundary surface 30400 .

Alternatively, the boundary surface 30400 may be formed between the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 by the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 being discontinuous from each other. The boundary surface 30400 may be formed by distinguishing the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 from each other.

The boundary surface 30400 may be formed by the physical structure of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the physical structure of the ion transport storage layer 30500 being discontinuous from each other. The boundary surface 30400 may be formed by the physical structure of the second discoloration region 30303 and the physical structure of the first ion region 30501 being discontinuous from each other.

Since the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 are discontinuous from each other, there is an effect of stably causing electrochromic. When the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 are continuous with each other, the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 exchange electrons. As the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 exchange electrons, the difference between the number of electrons in the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 is eliminated. Therefore, electrochromic ions directed to regions containing a large number of electrons do not migrate further and do not cause electrochromism of the migration-based electrochromic element. Therefore, the electrochromic element 30001 does not operate. In contrast, when the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 are discontinuous with each other, the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 cannot exchange electrons. Therefore, the difference between the number of electrons in the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 is maintained. Therefore, electrochromic ions can migrate to the electrochromic layer 30300 or the ion transport storage layer 30500. The electrochromic layer 30300 or the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be electrochromic due to the migration of electrochromic ions. As a result, electrochromism of the electrochromic element 30001 is stably induced, and the electrochromic element 30001 operates properly.

The internal structure of the electrochromic element 30001 due to the boundary surface 30400 and the imaginary line has been described above.

Hereinafter, an example of the physical structure of the electrochromic element 30001 will be described.

77 is a cross-sectional view of an electrochromic element 30001 showing a pillar, which is an example of a physical structure according to an embodiment of the present application.

78 is a cross-sectional view of an electrochromic element 30001 showing a pillar, which is an example of a physical structure according to an embodiment of the present application.

Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78 .

The physical structure of the electrochromic element 30001 according to the embodiment of the present application may be a pillar.

The column may include a color-changing column 30305 and an ion column 30505, the color-changing column 30305 includes a first color-changing column 30310 and a second color-changing column 30330, and the ion column 30505 includes a first ion column 30510 and a second ion column 30530. The color-changing pillars 30305 can be defined as physical structures in the electrochromic layer 30300, and the ion pillars 30505 can be defined as physical structures in the ion transport storage layer 30500.

The post may have an outer shape extending in one direction.

The post may have an outer shape extending from the first electrode 30100 to the second electrode 30700 or from the second electrode 30700 to the first electrode 30100 .

Each post may include an upper end, a lower end, a left end and a right end.

The first color changing column 30310 may include a first color changing left end 30311, a first color changing right end 30313, a first color changing lower end 30315 and a first color changing upper end 30317, and the second color changing column 30330 may include a second color changing left end 30331, a second color changing right end 30333, The second color changing lower end 30335 and the second color changing upper end 30337, the first ion column 30510 may include a first ion left end 30511, a first ion right end 30513, a first ion upper end 30515 and a first ion left end 30517, and the second ion column 30530 may Including the second ion left end 30531, the second ion right end 30533, the second ion upper end 30535 and the second ion left end 30537.

The upper, lower, left and right ends may be organically connected to each other and define the outer shape of the column.

The upper, lower, left and right ends can be visually identified. The upper, lower, left, and right ends can be visually identified by distinguishing the columns.

The posts may have a predetermined positional relationship.

The positional relationship may include a contact relationship between a post and an area of the electrochromic element 30001 and a contact relationship between a post and another post.

The pillars may be in contact with areas of the electrochromic element 30001 .

The color changing post 30305 may be in contact with the first contact surface 30200 or the boundary surface 30400 . The upper end of the color changing column 30305 may be in contact with the first contact surface 30200 , and the lower end of the color changing column 30305 may be in contact with the boundary surface 30400 .

The ion column 30505 may be in contact with the boundary surface 30400 or in contact with the second contact surface 30600 . The upper end of the ion column 30505 may be in contact with the boundary surface 30400 , and the lower end of the ion column 30505 may be in contact with the second contact surface 30600 .

The posts may be spaced from each other or in contact with each other.

The color-changing column 30305 may be formed to be spaced apart from another color-changing column 30305 or an ion column 30505 . The ion column 30505 may be formed to be spaced apart from another ion column 30505 or a color-changing column 30505 .

The color-changing column 30305 may be formed in contact with another color-changing column 30305 . The first color changing column 30310 may be in contact with the second color changing column 30330, as shown. When the color-changing columns 30305 are in contact with each other, the left ends of the color-changing columns 30305 may be in contact with the right ends of the color-changing columns 30305 . The left and right ends in contact with each other may be the same surface. The first color changing right end 30313 of the first color changing column 30310 may be in contact with the second color changing left end 30331 of the second color changing column 30330 . In this case, the first color changing right end 30313 and the second color changing left end 30331 may be the same surface. Alternatively, the first color changing left end 30311 of the first color changing column 30310 may be in contact with the second color changing right end 30333 of the second color changing column 30330 . In this case, the first color changing left end 30311 and the second color changing right end 30333 may be the same surface.

The ion columns 30505 may be in contact with each other. Since the first ion column 30510 and the second ion column 30530 may have the same positional relationship as that between the first and second color-changing columns 30310 and 30330 described above, a repeated description thereof will be omitted.

The color changing column 30305 can be in contact with the ion column 30505. The first color changing column 30310 and the second color changing column 30330 may be in contact with the first ion column 30510 or the second ion column 30530 .

When the color-changing column 30305 is in contact with the ion column 30505, the lower end of the color-changing column 30305 may be in contact with the upper end of the ion column 30505. The region of the lower end of the color-changing column 30305 may be in contact with the region of the upper end of the ion column 30505 . When the first color changing column 30310 is in contact with the first ion column 30510, the first color changing lower end 30315 may be in contact with the first ion upper end 30515.

The color-changing column 30305 can be in contact with two or more ion columns 30505. In this case, the lower ends of the color-changing columns 30305 may be in contact with the upper ends of two or more ion columns 30505. The ion column 30505 can be in contact with two or more color-changing columns 30305. In this case, the upper ends of the ion columns 30505 may be in contact with the lower ends of the two or more color-changing columns 30305 .

When the color-changing column 30305 is in contact with the ion column 30505, the left and right ends of the color-changing column 30305 may be in contact with the left or right end of the ion column 30505. The first color changing left end 30311 of the first color changing column 30310 may be in contact with the first ion left end 30511 or the first ion right end 30513 of the first ion column 30510 . Alternatively, the first color changing left end 30311 of the first color changing column 30310 may be in contact with the first ion left end 30511 of the first ion column 30510 and the second ion right end 30533 of the second ion column 30530 . The left or right end of the color changing column 30305 and the left or right end of the ion column 30505 that are in contact with each other may be the same surface.

Alternatively, when the color-changing column 30305 is in contact with the ion column 30505, the left and right ends of the color-changing column 30305 may not be in contact with the left or right end of the ion column 30505. In this case, only the lower end of the color changing column 30305 and the upper end of the ion column 30505 can be in contact with each other.

When the color-changing pillars 30305 are in contact with the ion pillars 30505 as described above, the boundary surface 30400 may be formed at the surface where the color-changing pillars 30305 and the ion pillars 30505 are in contact. In the boundary surface 30400, the lower end of the color changing column 30305 and the upper end of the ion column 30505 may be the same surface. The boundary surfaces 30400 may be formed on the same surface. In other words, the boundary surface 30400 may be the lower end of the color-changing column 30305 or the upper end of the ion column 30505.

The column can be continuous.

Column continuous means that the outer shape of the column is continuous. A column being discontinuous from another column means that the column is distinct from another column.

The color changing column 30305 and the ion column 30505 may be continuous. The first color changing column 30310, the second color changing column 30330, the first ion column 30510 and the second ion column 30530 may be continuous.

The bars can be continuous with respect to the imaginary line.

The color changing column 30305 may be continuous with respect to the first imaginary line 30901 .

The first imaginary line 30901 may be disposed in the electrochromic layer 30300 . The first imaginary line 30901 may be a collection of imaginary lines such that the color changing column 30305 is continuous with respect to the first imaginary line 30901 . The first imaginary line 30901 with respect to which the color-changing columns 30305 may be continuous may be selected from any imaginary line that may be provided in the electrochromic layer 30300.

The number of color-changing columns 30305 continuous through the first imaginary line 30901 may be 20% or more of the total number of color-changing columns 30305 present in the electrochromic layer 30300 . Preferably, the number of color-changing columns 30305 continuous through the first imaginary line 30901 may be 50% or more of the total number of color-changing columns 30305 existing in the electrochromic layer 30300 . More preferably, the number of the color-changing columns 30305 continuous through the first imaginary line 30901 may be 70% or more of the total number of the color-changing columns 30305 existing in the electrochromic layer 30300 .

At least one of the left and right ends of the color changing column 30305 may be continuous with respect to the first imaginary line 30901 .

The area of the electrochromic layer 30300 is divided into a first discoloration area 30301 and a second discoloration area 30303 by a first imaginary line 30901 . The repeated description of the first color changing area 30301 and the second color changing area 30303 will be omitted.

The color-changing columns 30305 in the divided area may be continuous. The color changing columns 30305 of the first color changing area 30301 and the color changing columns 30305 of the second color changing area 30303 may be continuous.

The divided areas in the color changing column 30305 may be continuous. The first color changing area 30301 of the color changing column 30305 and the second color changing area 30303 of the color changing column 30305 may be continuous.

The color change column 30305 is continuous with respect to the first imaginary line 30901, which means that the left end of the color change column 30305 in the first color change area 30301 and the left end of the color change column 30305 in the second color change area 30303 are continuous, and it means that the color change column 30305 is continuous in the first color change area 30301. The left end in the first discoloration area 30301 and the left end in the second discoloration area 30303 meet at a point on the first imaginary line 30901 .

Alternatively, the color change column 30305 is continuous with respect to the first imaginary line 30901 means that the right end of the color change column 30305 in the first color change area 30301 and the right end of the color change column 30305 in the second color change area 30303 are continuous, and it means that the color change column 30305 is continuous The right end in the first discoloration area 30301 and the right end in the second discoloration area 30303 meet at a point on the first imaginary line 30901 .

In other words, the continuity of the color changing column 30305 relative to the first imaginary line 30901 may mean that the color changing column 30305 is at the left end of the first color changing area 30301, the color changing column 30305 is at the left end in the second color changing area 30303, and the color changing column 30305 is at the first end of the color changing area 30303. One or more of the right end in the color changing area 30301 and the right end of the color changing column 30305 in the second color changing area 30303 meet at a point on the first imaginary line 30901 with respect to the first imaginary line 30901 .

The ion column 30505 may be continuous with respect to the second imaginary line 30903.

The second imaginary line 30903 may be disposed in the ion transport storage layer 30500. The second imaginary line 30903 may be a set of imaginary lines such that the ion column 30505 is continuous with respect to the second imaginary line 30903. The second imaginary line 30903 with respect to which the ion column 30505 may be continuous may be selected from any imaginary line that may be provided in the ion transport storage layer 30500.

The number of ion columns 30505 that are continuous through the second imaginary line 30903 may be 20% or more of the total number of ion columns 30505 present in the ion transport storage layer 30500 . Preferably, the number of ion columns 30505 that are continuous through the second imaginary line 30903 may be 50% or more of the total number of ion columns 30505 present in the ion transport storage layer 30500 . More preferably, the number of ion columns 30505 that are continuous through the second imaginary line 30903 may be 70% or more of the total number of ion columns 30505 present in the ion transport storage layer 30500 .

At least one of the left and right ends of the ion column 30505 may be continuous with respect to the second imaginary line 30903 .

The region of the ion transport storage layer 30500 is divided into a first ion region 30501 and a second ion region 30503 by a second imaginary line 30903 . A repeated description of the first ion region 30501 and the second ion region 30503 will be omitted.

The ion columns 30505 in the divided regions may be continuous. The ion column 30505 of the first ion region 30501 and the ion column 30505 of the second ion region 30503 may be continuous.

The divided regions in the ion column 30505 may be continuous. The first ion region 30501 of the ion column 30505 and the second ion region 30503 of the ion column 30505 may be continuous.

The ion column 30505 is continuous with respect to the second imaginary line 30903, which means that the left end of the ion column 30505 in the first ion region 30501 and the left end of the ion column 30505 in the second ion region 30503 are continuous, and it means that the ion column 30505 is continuous in the second ion region 30503. The left end in the one ion region 30501 and the left end in the second ion region 30503 meet at a point on the second imaginary line 30903 .

Alternatively, the ion column 30505 is continuous with respect to the second imaginary line 30903 means that the right end of the ion column 30505 in the first ion region 30501 and the right end of the ion column 30505 in the second ion region 30503 are continuous, and means that the ion column 30505 is continuous The right end in the first ion region 30501 and the right end in the second ion region 30503 meet at a point on the second imaginary line 30903 .

In other words, the ion column 30505 is continuous with respect to the second imaginary line 30903 may mean that the ion column 30505 is at the left end in the first ion region 30501, the ion column 30505 is at the left end in the second ion region 30503, and the ion column 30505 is at the left end of the first ion region 30503. One or more of the right end in ion region 30501 and the right end of ion column 30505 in second ion region 30503 meet at a point on second imaginary line 30903 relative to first imaginary line 30901 .

The color-changing column 30305 and the ion column 30505 may be discontinuous with each other.

The color-changing pillars 30305 and the ionic pillars 30505 may be discontinuous with respect to each other with respect to the boundary surface 30400 . The color changing column 30305 and the ionic column 30505 can be distinguished by the boundary surface. The color-changing pillars 30305 and the ionic pillars 30505 can be visually distinguished by the boundary surface.

The first and second color-changing columns 30310 and 30330 may be discontinuous from the first and second ion columns 30510 and 30530 with respect to the boundary surface 30400 .

The color-changing column 30305 can be in contact with the ion column 30505, and the color-changing column 30305 is not continuous with the ion column 30505.

The left and right ends of the color-changing column 30305 may be discontinuous with the left and right ends of the ion column 30505, which are in contact with the left and right ends of the color-changing column 30305.

In this case, the left or right end of the color-changing column 30305 may be in contact with one of the left and right ends of the ion column 30505. The tip of the left end of the color-changing column 30305 may be in contact with the tip of any one of the left and right ends of the ion column 30505. In this case, the surface of the left end of the color-changing column 30305 and the surface of any one of the left and right ends of the ion column 30505 may be the same surface.

The left or right end of the color changing column 30305 and the left or right end of the ion column 30505 that are in contact with each other may be discontinuous with respect to the boundary surface 30400 . For example, the left end of the color changing column 30305 and the left end of the ion column 30505 in contact with each other may be discontinuous with respect to the boundary surface. Left and right ends that are in contact with each other can be distinguished with respect to the boundary surface 30400 . The left and right ends that are in contact with each other can be visually distinguished with respect to the boundary surface 30400 .

Alternatively, the color-changing column 30305 may be in contact with the ion column 30505 without its left and right ends being in contact with each other. In this case, only the lower end of the color-changing column 30305 and the upper end of the ion column 30505 in contact with the color-changing column 30305 may contact each other. Even in this case, the color-changing pillars 30305 and the ionic pillars 30505 are distinguishable with respect to the boundary surface 30400 and are discontinuous.

Posts can have various external shapes.

FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating an external shape of a column according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 79, each post may have a predetermined width and a predetermined length, and form a predetermined angle with another element.

The width and length of each column will be described by taking the first color-changing column 30310 as an example. The width and length of the first color-changing columns 30310 to be described below can also be applied to the color-changing columns 30305 other than the first color-changing columns 30310 .

The first color changing left end 30311 and the first color changing right end 30313 of the first color changing column 30310 may have predetermined lengths. The lengths may include a first length L ₁ and a second length L ₂ .

The first color changing left end 30311 may have a first length L ₁ , and the first color changing right end 30313 may have a second length L ₂ .

The lengths of the first color changing left end 30311 and the first color changing right end 30313 may be formed in various lengths. The lengths of the first color changing left end 30311 and the first color changing right end 30313 may be equal to or different from each other. The first length L ₁ and the second length L ₂ may be equal or different lengths from each other.

For each region, the first color changing column 30310 may have various widths. The first color changing column 30310 may include a first area 30315 and a second area 30317 . The widths may include a first width W1 and a second width W2. The first color changing column 30310 may have a first width W1 in the first region 30315 and a second width W2 in the second region 30317 . The first width and the second width may be different from each other.

The first color changing column 30310 may form a predetermined angle with the first electrode 30100 , the ion transport storage layer 30500 and the ion column 30505 . The first color changing left end 30311 and the first color changing right end 30313 of the first color changing column 30310 may form a predetermined angle with the first electrode 30100 , the ion transporting storage layer 30500 and the ion column 30505 .

When the first color-changing pillars 30310 are in contact with the boundary surface 30400 , the first color-changing pillars 30310 may form a predetermined angle with the boundary surface 30400 . The angles may include a first angle θ ₁ and a second angle θ ₂ . The first color changing left end 30311 of the first color changing column 30310 may form a first angle θ ₁ with the boundary surface 30400 , and the first color changing right end 30313 of the first color changing column 30310 may form a second angle θ ₂ with the boundary surface 30400 .

When the first color changing column 30310 is in contact with the first contact surface 30200 , the first color changing column 30310 may form a predetermined angle with the first contact surface 30200 . In this case, since the angle can be formed like the angle between the first color-changing column 30310 and the boundary surface 30400 as described above, a repeated description thereof will be omitted.

In the case of the ion column 30505 , the ion column 30505 may form a predetermined angle with the electrochromic layer 30300 , the color-changing column 30305 and the second electrode 30700 . When the ion column 30505 is in contact with the boundary surface 30400 , the ion column 30505 may form a predetermined angle with the boundary surface 30400 . When the ion column 30505 is in contact with the second contact surface 30600, the ion column 30505 may form a predetermined angle with the second contact surface 30600.

The electrochromic element 30001 including the posts as physical structures has been described above.

Hereinafter, the change of the optical state of the electrochromic element 30001 including the pillars will be described.

The optical state of the electrochromic element 30001 comprising the pillars can be changed due to the migration of electrons and electrochromic ions.

80 is a graph illustrating the migration of electrochromic ions according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to Figure 80, electrochromic ions can migrate between adjacent pillars and along the boundary surface 30400.

Electrochromic ions can migrate between columns.

Electrochromic ions can migrate between the color-changing pillars 30305. Electrochromic ions can migrate along the contact surfaces of the color-changing pillars 30305 that are in contact with each other. Electrochromic ions can migrate along the contact surface between the first color-changing pillar 30310 and the second color-changing pillar 30330 . Electrochromic ions may migrate along the contact surface between the left and right ends of the color-changing pillars 30305 that are in contact with each other. Electrochromic ions may migrate along the contact surface between the first color-changing right end 30313 of the first color-changing column 30310 and the second color-changing left end 30331 of the second color-changing column 30330 .

Electrochromic ions can migrate between the ion columns 30505. Since the electrochromic ions that migrate between the ion columns 30505 can migrate like the electrochromic ions that migrate between the color-changing columns 303035, a repeated description thereof will be omitted.

Electrochromic ions can migrate along the boundary surface 30400. Electrochromic ions that migrate along the boundary surface 30400 can migrate in the lateral direction.

When the pillars and boundary surfaces 30400 are formed in the electrochromic element 30001, there may be predetermined effects.

This effect may include improved electrochromic speed, improved electrochromic uniformity, and improved decolorization.

81 is a comparative graph for illustrating the improved electrochromic speed of an electrochromic element 30001 including a pillar and a boundary surface 30400 according to an embodiment of the present application.

82 is a comparative graph for illustrating the improved electrochromic uniformity of an electrochromic element 30001 including a pillar and a boundary surface 30400 according to an embodiment of the present application.

83 is a comparative graph for illustrating the improved decolorization of an electrochromic element 30001 including a pillar and a boundary surface 30400 according to an embodiment of the present application.

Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83 .

Electrochromic ions can migrate along predetermined paths.

Electrochromic ions can migrate between the color-changing pillars 30305 in contact with each other, be transported to the boundary surface 30400, and migrate along the boundary surface 30400 to migrate between the ion pillars 30505 in contact with each other. Alternatively, electrochromic ions can migrate between the ion columns 30505 in contact with each other, be transported to the boundary surface 30400, and migrate along the boundary surface 30400 to migrate between the color-changing columns 30305.

As the electrochromic ions migrate along the pillars and boundary surfaces 30400, there is an effect of increasing the speed of electrochromic.

As shown in FIG. 81( b ), when the electrochromic element does not include pillars and boundary surfaces, the predetermined path along which the electrochromic ions migrate may not be formed in the electrochromic element. When the electrochromic ions migrate, the electrochromic ions migrate in irregular directions. When electrochromic ions migrate from one element to another, the electrochromic ions may not migrate along the shortest path. In contrast, when the electrochromic element includes posts and boundary surfaces 30400, electrochromic ions can migrate along the contact surfaces between the posts. Thus, as electrochromic ions migrate from one element to another, the electrochromic ions migrate in regular directions along the contact surfaces between the pillars. That is, electrochromic ions migrate from one element to another along the shortest path. As a result, when the electrochromic element 30001 includes pillars, the optical state of the electrochromic element 30001 can be changed since the electrochromic ions migrate along the shortest path. Therefore, when the electrochromic element 30001 includes the pillars, there is an effect of increasing the electrochromic speed.

As the electrochromic ions migrate along the pillars and boundary surfaces 30400, there is an effect of improving electrochromic uniformity. The uniformity of electrochromism can be defined by the variation in the degree of electrochromism in different regions. When the variation is smaller, the uniformity of the electrochromic can be improved.

As shown in Figure 82(b), when the electrochromic element does not include pillars and boundary surfaces 30400, the electrochromic ions migrate irregularly. Due to the irregular migration of electrochromic ions, the optical state of the electrochromic element may change irregularly in various regions of the electrochromic element.

In contrast, when the electrochromic element 30001 includes the boundary surface 30400, the electrochromic ions can migrate along the boundary surface 30400, and the electrochromic ions can be dispersed in the lateral direction. When the electrochromic ions migrate by being dispersed in the lateral direction, the concentration of the electrochromic ions delivered to the plurality of regions can become uniform. Therefore, the plurality of regions of the electrochromic element 30001 are electrochromic to almost the same degree, and thus, the optical states of the plurality of regions can become uniform. Therefore, there is an effect of improving the electrochromic uniformity of the electrochromic element 30001 .

When the electrochromic element 30001 includes posts in multiple regions, electrochromic ions around the posts can be directed to adjacent posts. Due to the pillars, the electrochromic ions can be dispersed to multiple regions, and the dispersed electrochromic ions can migrate along the contact surfaces between the pillars that are in contact with each other. Therefore, electrochromic ions can be delivered to the entire area of the electrochromic element 30001 . As a result, the plurality of regions of the electrochromic element 30001 are electrochromic to almost the same degree, and thus, the optical states of the plurality of regions can become uniform. Therefore, there is an effect of improving the electrochromic uniformity of the electrochromic element 30001 .

As the electrochromic ions migrate along the pillars and boundary surfaces 30400, there is an effect of improving decolorization.

As shown in Figure 83(b), when the electrochromic element does not include pillars and boundary surfaces 30400, the electrochromic element can have a memory effect. The memory effect can be defined as a phenomenon in which, after the application of electric power to the electrochromic element is stopped, the optical state based on the electric power applied before the application of electric power is stopped is maintained. When the electrochromic element does not include the pillars and the boundary surface 30400, the electrochromic ions may migrate due to the power applied to them and remain in the positions caused by the migration even after the power application is stopped. Because the position of the electrochromic ions is maintained, the colored state of the electrochromic element due to the migrated electrochromic ions is also maintained.

In contrast, when the electrochromic element 30001 includes the boundary surface 30400, the electrochromic ions are directed to the boundary surface 30400 after the application of power is stopped. Therefore, after the application of power is stopped, the electrochromic element 30001 is discolored due to the electrochromic ions before the application of power is stopped, rather than remaining in a colored state.

When the electrochromic element 30001 includes pillars, electrochromic ions are directed to the pillars after the application of electric power is stopped. Because the pillars are formed in multiple regions of the electrochromic element 30001, the electrochromic ions migrate by being directed to the multiple regions at the same time. Therefore, the electrochromic element 30001 is discolored after the application of electric power is stopped, instead of maintaining the colored state due to the electrochromic ions before the application of electric power is stopped.

As a result, when the electrochromic element 30001 includes the pillars and the boundary surface 30400, the discoloration effect after the application of electric power is stopped can be improved.

Hereinafter, when the electrochromic element 30001 is implemented in the form of a mirror, the reflectance during the colored state and the reflectance during the decolorized state will be described for each wavelength.

The electrochromic element 30001 may be implemented in the form of a mirror by implementing one of the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 with a light-reflecting material, or the electrochromic element 30001 is arranged on a mirror.

84 is a graph showing the reflectance of each wavelength of the electrochromic element 30001 during a colored state and a discolored state according to an embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 84 , the electrochromic element 30001 can have effects achieved with simpler processing than conventional electrochromic elements, while having the same optical characteristics and performance as conventional electrochromic elements.

This effect will be described with reference to Table 1 below and FIG. 84 .

[Table 1]

A conventional electrochromic element is defined as an electrochromic element in which three layers are arranged between a first electrode and a second electrode. In other words, the conventional electrochromic element further includes layers other than the electrochromic layer and the ion transport storage layer between the first electrode and the second electrode. The traditional electrochromic element is the 3-layer EC in Table 1 and Figure 15 above.

The electrochromic element 30001 according to the embodiment is an electrochromic element 30001 in which two layers are arranged between the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 . The electrochromic element 30001 according to the present application includes only the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 between the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 . The electrochromic element 30001 according to the present application is the 2-layer EC in Table 1 and FIG. 15 above.

In the experiment, the reflectance in the colored state and the discolored state was measured by applying light in the visible light range to the electrochromic element 30001 realized by using a mirror.

Light in the visible range was applied to a 3-layer EC as a conventional electrochromic element implemented with mirrors. Here, the average reflectance in the colored state is 7.849%, the average reflectance in the decolorized state is 59.967%, and the difference between the reflectances in the colored state and the decolorized state is 52.118%.

Light in the visible range includes violet light at 400 nm, blue at 476 nm, green at 550 nm, amber at 580 nm, orange at 610 nm, and red at 700 nm.

When violet light having a wavelength of 400 nm was applied to the electrochromic element 30001, the reflectance in the colored state was 15.933%, and the reflectance in the decolorized state was 24.763%.

When blue light having a wavelength of 476 nm was applied to the electrochromic element 30001, the reflectance in the colored state was 23.608%, and the reflectance in the decolorized state was 66.262%.

When green light having a wavelength of 550 nm was applied to the electrochromic element 30001, the reflectance in the colored state was 7.111%, and the reflectance in the decolorized state was 61.785%.

When amber light having a wavelength of 580 nm was applied to the electrochromic element 30001, the reflectance in the colored state was 11.420%, and the reflectance in the decolorized state was 72.237%.

When orange light having a wavelength of 610 nm was applied to the electrochromic element 30001, the reflectance in the colored state was 4.398%, and the reflectance in the decolorized state was 72.992%.

When red light having a wavelength of 700 nm was applied to the electrochromic element 30001, the reflectance in the colored state was 4.642%, and the reflectance in the decolorized state was 61.000%.

As a result, since light in the visible light range was applied to the electrochromic element 30001, the average reflectance in the colored state was 8.541%, the average reflectance in the decolorized state was 59.727%, and the average reflectance in the colored state and the decolorized state The difference between the rates is 51.186%.

According to the above experiment, the difference between the reflectance in the colored state and the decolorized state of the electrochromic element 30001 is almost the same as that of the 3-layer EC. In other words, the electrochromic element 30001 has almost the same performance as the conventional 3-layer EC.

Meanwhile, the electrochromic element 30001 has the effect of being formed with simpler processing. In the case of the conventional 3-layer EC, since three layers are arranged between the first electrode and the second electrode, a process of forming the three layers has to be performed to realize the 3-layer EC. In contrast, since in the case of the electrochromic element 30001 according to the present application, two layers are provided between the first electrode and the second electrode, only a process of forming two layers is required to realize the electrochromic element 30001 . Therefore, since the number of processes required to implement the electrochromic element 30001 is smaller than that required to implement the conventional 3-layer EC, the process to implement the electrochromic element 30001 can be simplified.

2. The ion transport storage layer region of the electrochromic element

85 is a diagram illustrating an upper region 30502 and a lower region 30504 of an ion transport storage layer 30500 according to an embodiment of the present application.

FIG. 86 is a view showing discoloration of the electrochromic element 30001 according to an embodiment of the present application.

Referring to FIG. 85 , an ion transport storage layer 30500 according to an embodiment of the present application may include an upper region 30502 and a lower region 30504 .

The upper region 30502 and the lower region 30504 may have different material compositions.

The ion transport storage layer 30500 may include a first material and a second material. The first material can be defined as an insulating material. The second material can be defined as an electrochromic material.

The upper region 30502 can include the first material.

The lower region 30504 can include a first material and a second material.

Electrochromic materials may include redox materials and electrochromic ions. Electrochromic materials can be defined as materials whose optical properties are variable.

Redox materials may include redox materials such as TiO2, V2O5, Nb2O5, Cr2O3, FeO2, CoO2, NiO2, RhO2, Ta2O5, and WO3, as well as redox materials such as NiO2, IrO2, CoO2, iridium-magnesium oxide, nickel-magnesium oxide oxidative discoloration materials of titanium-vanadium oxides.

Chromium ions can be defined as materials that cause changes in the optical properties of electrochromic materials. Chromium ions may include cathode ions such as OH- and anode ions such as H+ and Li+.

Insulating materials can include SiO2, Al2O3, Nb2O3, Ta2O5, LiTaO3, LiNbO3, SiO2, Al2O3, Nb2O3, Ta2O5, LiTaO3, LiNbO3, La2TiO7, La2TiO7, SrZrO3, ZrO2, Y2O3, Nb2O5, La2Ti2O7, LaTiO3, HfO2, La2TiO7, La2TiO7, At least one of SrZrO3, ZrO2, Y2O3, Nb2O5, La2Ti2O7, LaTiO3 and HfO2.

The upper region 30502 and the lower region 30504 may have different material concentrations.

In the upper region 30502, the concentration of the first material may be 90% or higher.

In the lower region 30504, the concentration of the first material may be 40% to 80%, the concentration of the second material may be 20% to 60%, and the concentration ratio between the first material and the second material may be 8:2 to 4:6.

For each location, the concentration ratio between the first material and the second material in the lower region 30504 can be varied.

In the lower region 30504, the concentration of the second material may increase as it gets closer to the electrochromic layer 30300 or the upper region 30502. In the lower region 30504, the concentration of the first material may increase as it gets closer to the second electrode 30700.

In the lower region 30504, the amount of the second material relative to the first material in the region proximate the upper region 30502 may be smaller than the amount of the second material relative to the first material in the region proximate the second electrode 30700.

In the lower region 30504, the amount of the first material relative to the second material in the region proximate the second electrode 30700 may be less than the amount of the first material relative to the second material in the region proximate the upper region 30502.

Since the upper region 30502 and the lower region 30504 have different material compositions as described above, the properties of the upper region 30502 may differ from the properties of the lower region 30504.

The upper region 30502 and the lower region 30504 may have different properties. The different properties may include optical properties and electrical properties. Optical properties may include refractive index, transmittance, and the like. Electrical properties may include insulation, electrical resistance, ion transport, and the like.

The optical properties may include first optical properties and second optical properties, and the electrical properties may include first electrical properties and second electrical properties.

The upper region 30502 can have a first optical characteristic and the lower region 30504 can have a second optical characteristic, the first optical characteristic and the second optical characteristic being different.

The upper region 30502 can have a first electrical property and the lower region 30504 can have a second electrical property, and the first electrical property and the second electrical property are different. For example, lower region 30504 can have electrical properties that allow electrons and electrochromic ions to migrate in lower region 30504, while upper region 30502 has electrical properties that allow electrochromic ions to migrate in upper region 30502 but prevent electrons from migrating in upper region 30502 electrical characteristics.

Since the upper region 30502 and the lower region 30504 have different properties, the color change stability of the electrochromic element 30002 can be improved. For example, electrons in the electrochromic layer 30300 can be transported to the ion transport storage layer 30500 when both the upper region 30502 and the lower region 30504 are conductive. When the ion transport storage layer 30500 includes an oxidative color changing material, the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be decolorized by electrochromic ions migrating to the ion transport storage layer 30500 . Conversely, the electrical properties of the upper region 30502 and the lower region 30504 may be different such that the upper region 30502 is insulating and the lower region 30504 is conductive. In this case, electrons in the electrochromic layer 30300 can be blocked by the upper region 30502. Therefore, the colored state of the ion transport storage layer 30500 can be maintained. As a result, the discoloration stability of the electrochromic element 30001 can be improved.

Referring to FIG. 86, even when power is applied to the electrochromic element 30001, the upper region can maintain an optical state therein.

When a first power is applied to the electrochromic element 30001, the electrochromic layer 30300 and the lower region 30504 can have a first optical state, and the upper region 30502 can have a first optical state. When the second power is applied to the electrochromic element, the electrochromic layer 30300 and the lower region 30504 can have the second optical state, and the upper region 30502 can still have the first optical state.

In other words, when power for color change of electrochromic element 30001 is applied to electrochromic element 30001, electrochromic layer 30300 and lower region 30504 may be colored, while upper region 30502 remains discolored.

3. Yet another embodiment of the first electrode and the second electrode of the electrochromic element

The first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 according to embodiments of the present application may have similar characteristics. Properties may include electrical properties and optical properties.

The electrical properties of the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 may be similar. Electrical properties may include insulation, electrical resistance, ion transport, and the like. The resistance of the first electrode 30100 and the resistance of the second electrode 30700 may have similar values.

Optical properties of the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 may be similar.

The size of the particles constituting the first electrode 30100 and the size of the particles constituting the second electrode 30700 may be adjusted so that the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 have similar characteristics. The particle size of the first electrode 30100 and the particle size of the second electrode 30700 may be similar.

The temperature conditions of the process for forming the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 may be adjusted to be similar to make the particle size of the first electrode 30100 similar to that of the second electrode 30700 . The temperature conditions of the process for forming the first electrode 30100 may be set to be similar to those of the process for forming the second electrode 30700 . Therefore, the particle size of the first electrode 30100 can be adjusted to be similar to the particle size of the second electrode 30700 .

Since the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 have similar characteristics, there is an effect of improving the uniformity of discoloration of the electrochromic element. For example, when the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 have different resistance values, the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 may receive electrons at different speeds. The speed at which electrons are transported from the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 to each of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be different. Therefore, in the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500, the speed at which the optical state changes may be different. Conversely, when the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 have similar resistance values, the first electrode 30100 and the second electrode 30700 can receive electrons at similar speeds and transport the electrons to the electrochromic layer 30300 and ion transport storage Layer 30500. Thus, the rate of optical state change may be similar in the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500. As a result, there is an effect of improving the uniformity of discoloration of the electrochromic element because the optical states in the layers change at a similar rate.

4. Practical realization of electrochromic element

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an electrochromic element actually implemented according to an embodiment of the present application.

88 is a diagram showing first and second imaginary lines and each layer of the electrochromic element provided in an electrochromic element actually realized according to an embodiment of the present application.

Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 .

According to an embodiment of the present application, the electrochromic element actually implemented may include a first electrode 30100 , an electrochromic layer 30300 , an ion transport storage layer 30500 and a second electrode 30700 . The first contact surface 30200 may be formed by the contact of the first electrode 30100 with the electrochromic layer 30300, the boundary surface 30400 may be formed by the contact of the electrochromic layer 30300 with the ion transport storage layer 30500, and the second contact surface 30600 may be formed by the contact of the electrochromic layer 30300 with the ion transport storage layer 30500 The transport memory layer 30500 is formed in contact with the second electrode 30700 .

The first imaginary line 30901 may be disposed in the electrochromic layer 30300 . The first imaginary line 30901 may be arranged such that the physical structure in the electrochromic layer 30300 is continuous with respect to the first imaginary line 30901 .

The second imaginary line 30903 may be disposed in the ion transport storage layer 30500. The second imaginary line 30903 may be arranged such that the physical structure in the ion transport storage layer 30500 is continuous with respect to the second imaginary line 30903 .

However, the physical structure of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the physical structure of the ion transport storage layer 30500 may not be continuous with each other with respect to the boundary surface 30400 .

The electrochromic element may include pillars 30010 and dielectrics 30030 as physical structures. The pillars formed in the electrochromic layer 30300 may be defined as color-changing pillars 30305 , and the pillars formed in the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be defined as ion pillars 30505 . The medium 30030 formed in the electrochromic layer 30300 may be defined as a color-changing medium 30350 , and the medium 30030 formed in the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be defined as an ionic medium 30550 .

A plurality of color-changing pillars 30305 may be formed in the electrochromic layer 30300 . A plurality of ion columns 30505 may be formed in the ion transport storage layer 30500.

The color-changing pillars 30305 may be formed to be spaced apart from or in contact with other color-changing pillars 30305 . When the color-changing columns 30305 are in contact with each other, the left and right ends of the color-changing columns 30305 in contact with each other may contact each other.

The ion pillars 30505 can be formed to be spaced apart from or in contact with other ion pillars 30505 . When the ion columns 30505 contact each other, left and right ends of the ion columns 30505 that are in contact with each other may contact each other.

The color-changing column 30305 and the ion column 30505 may be in contact with each other. In this case, the lower end of the color changing column 30305 may be in contact with the upper end of the ion column 30505.

The color changing column 30305 and the ion column 30505 may be continuous with respect to the imaginary line. The color changing column 30305 may be continuous with respect to the first imaginary line 30901 , and the ion column 30505 may be continuous with respect to the second imaginary line 30903 . The left and right ends of the color changing column 30305 may be continuous with respect to the first imaginary line 30901 , and the left and right ends of the ion column 30505 may be continuous with respect to the second imaginary line 30903 .

The color-changing pillars 30305 and the ion pillars 30505 may be discontinuous with respect to the boundary surface 30400. The color-changing column 30305 and the ion column 30505 may be in contact with each other, while the right or left end of the color-changing column 30305 is discontinuous from the right or left end of the ion column 30505 with respect to the boundary surface 30400.

The color-changing medium 30350 and the ionic medium 30550 may be continuous and discontinuous with each other.

The color-changing medium 30350 and the ionic medium 30550 may be continuous with respect to the dashed line. The color-changing medium 30350 may be continuous with respect to the first imaginary line 30901 , and the ionic medium 30550 may be continuous with respect to the second imaginary line 30903 . The outer peripheral surface of the color-changing medium 30350 may be continuous with respect to the first imaginary line 3090 , and the outer peripheral surface of the ionic medium 30550 may be continuous with respect to the second imaginary line 30903 .

The color-changing medium 30350 and the ionic medium 30550 may be discontinuous with respect to the boundary surface 30400. The peripheral surface of the color-changing medium 30350 and the peripheral surface of the ionic medium 30550 may be discontinuous from each other with respect to the boundary surface 30400 .

By the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 being continuous and the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 being discontinuous from each other, there is an effect of stably changing the optical state of the electrochromic element.

When each of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 is discontinuous, it becomes difficult for the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 to receive electrons or electrochromic ions and transfer electrons or electrochromic ions The color-changing ions are delivered to the entire area of each layer. Conversely, the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 can receive electrons or electrochromic ions and transport electrons or electrochromic ions to the the entire area. Therefore, the optical state can be changed in the entire area of each of the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500.

Since the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 are discontinuous from each other, there is an effect of stably causing electrochromic. When the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 are continuous with each other, the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 exchange electrons. Due to the exchange of electrons between the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500, the difference between the number of electrons in the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 is eliminated. Therefore, the electrochromic ions directed to the regions containing a large number of electrons do not migrate further and do not cause electrochromism of the migration-based electrochromic element. Therefore, the electrochromic element 30001 does not operate. In contrast, when the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 are discontinuous with each other, the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 cannot exchange electrons. Therefore, the difference between the number of electrons in the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 is maintained. Therefore, electrochromic ions can migrate to the electrochromic layer 30300 or the ion transport storage layer 30500. The electrochromic layer 30300 or the ion transport storage layer 30500 may be electrochromic due to the migration of electrochromic ions. As a result, electrochromism of the electrochromic element 30001 is stably induced, and the electrochromic element 30001 operates properly.

That is, by the electrochromic layer 30300 and the ion transport storage layer 30500 being continuous and discontinuous from each other, the optical state can be uniformly changed and maintained in the entire area of each layer. Therefore, there is an effect of stably changing the optical state of the electrochromic element.

The electrochromic element 30001 described above may be another embodiment of the electrochromic element 10200 of FIGS. 1 to 37 . The above-described driving module 21000 can drive the electrochromic element 30001 of FIGS. 74 to 88 . That is, the electrical connection member 21500 of the above-described driving module 21000 may be arranged in the electrochromic element 30001 of FIGS. 74 to 88 , and the trench structure 22100 may be formed in the electrochromic element 30001 of FIGS. The connection member 21500 receives driving power.

<Third Example Group>

Hereinafter, the electrochromic device according to the third embodiment group will be described.

FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating the electrochromic apparatus according to the first embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 89 , an electrochromic device 40001 according to the first embodiment includes an electrochromic element 40100 .

The electrochromic element 40100 may include a substrate 40110 , a transparent electrode 40120 , a first electrochromic layer 40130 , an ion transport layer 40140 , a second electrochromic layer 40150 and a reflective layer 40160 .

Electrochromic element 40100 may be connected to driver circuit 40170. The driver circuit 40170 may be electrically connected to the electrochromic element 40100 through wiring 40180 .

The driving circuit 40170 may be arranged in a region adjacent to the reflective layer 40160 . The distance between the driving circuit 40170 and the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be longer than the distance between the driving circuit 40170 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 .

The driving circuit 40170 may be arranged on the rear surface of the reflective layer 40160 . By the substrate 40110 being adjacent to the outside and the driving circuit 40170 being disposed on the rear surface of the reflective layer 40160, the driving circuit 40170 can be prevented from being visible from the outside.

Electrochromic element 40100 may be a mirror. When the electrochromic element 40100 is a mirror, the electrochromic element 40100 can receive a driving voltage, and thus the reflectivity of the electrochromic element 40100 can be changed.

The transparent electrode 40120 may be arranged on the substrate 40110. The transparent electrode 40120 and the reflective layer 40160 may be arranged to face each other. The first electrochromic layer 40130 , the ion transport layer 40140 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be arranged between the transparent electrode 40120 and the reflective layer 40160 .

The transparent electrode 40120 may transmit incident light. The transparent electrode 40120 may be formed of a transparent conductive material. The transparent electrode 40120 may include a metal doped with at least one of indium, tin, zinc and/or oxide. For example, the first electrode 40210 and the second electrode 40250 may be formed of indium tin oxide (ITO), zinc oxide (ZnO), or indium zinc oxide (IZO). Alternatively, the transparent electrode 40120 may be formed of silver nanowires, metal meshes, oxide metal oxides (OMO), carbon nanotubes, and the like.

The reflection layer 40160 may be formed of a metal material having high reflectivity. The reflection layer 40160 may include at least one of aluminum (Al), copper (Cu), molybdenum (Mo), chromium (Cr), titanium (Ti), gold (Au), silver (Ag), and tungsten (W).

The first electrochromic layer 40130 may be disposed on the transparent electrode 40120. The first electrochromic layer 40130 may be formed of a material that changes color due to the movement of ions. The first electrochromic layer 40130 may include TiO, V2O5, Nb2O5, Cr2O3, MnO2, FeO2, CoO2, NiO2, RhO2, Ta2O5, IrO2, WO3, iridium-magnesium oxide, nickel-magnesium oxide, and titanium-vanadium oxide at least one of the oxides.

The ion transport layer 40140 may be an ion moving path between the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 . The first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may exchange ions through the ion transport layer 40140 . Although the ion transport layer 40140 becomes a moving path for ions, the ion transport layer 40140 may act as a barrier for electrons. That is, ions can move through the ion transport layer 40140, but electrons cannot move through it. In other words, the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 can exchange ions through the ion transport layer 40140, but cannot exchange electrons therethrough.

The ion transport layer 40140 may include an insulating material. The ion transport layer 40140 may be solid. The ion transport layer 40140 may include SiO2, Al2O3, Nb2O3, Ta2O5, LiTaO3, LiNbO3, SiO2, Al2O3, Nb2O3, Ta2O5, LiTaO3, LiNbO3, La2TiO7, La2TiO7, SrZrO3, ZrO2, Y2O3, Nb2O5, La2Ti2O7, LaTiO3, HfO2, La2TiO7, At least one of La2TiO7, SrZrO3, ZrO2, Y2O3, Nb2O5, La2Ti2O7, LaTiO3 and HfO2.

The second electrochromic layer 40150 may be disposed on the ion transport layer 40140. The second electrochromic layer 40150 may be formed of a material that changes color due to the movement of ions. The second electrochromic layer 40150 may include TiO, V2O5, Nb2O5, Cr2O3, MnO2, FeO2, CoO2, NiO2, RhO2, Ta2O5, IrO2, WO3, iridium-magnesium oxide, nickel-magnesium oxide, and titanium-vanadium oxide at least one of the oxides.

The first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be formed of different materials.

Ions may be implanted into any one of the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150. The ions may be at least one of H+ ions or Li+ ions.

Optical properties of the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be changed due to the movement of ions. When ions are implanted into the first electrochromic layer 40130, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be discolored. When ions are implanted into the first electrochromic layer 40130, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be colored or decolorized. When ions are implanted into the first electrochromic layer 40130, the light transmittance and/or light absorption rate of the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be changed. When ions are implanted into the first electrochromic layer 40130, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be reduced. When ions are implanted into the first electrochromic layer 40130, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be reduced and discolored. When ions are implanted into the first electrochromic layer 40130, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be reduced and colored. Alternatively, when ions are implanted into the first electrochromic layer 40130, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be reduced and decolorized.

The ions implanted into the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be released. When the ions of the first electrochromic layer 40130 are released, the optical properties of the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be changed. When ions of the first electrochromic layer 40130 are released, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be discolored. When the ions of the first electrochromic layer 40130 are released, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be colored or decolorized. When the ions of the first electrochromic layer 40130 are released, the light transmittance and/or light absorption rate of the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be changed. When ions of the first electrochromic layer 40130 are released, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be oxidized. When ions of the first electrochromic layer 40130 are released, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be oxidized and discolored. When ions of the first electrochromic layer 40130 are released, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be oxidized and colored. Alternatively, when ions of the first electrochromic layer 40130 are released, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be oxidized and decolorized.

Ions may be implanted into the second electrochromic layer 40150. When ions are implanted into the second electrochromic layer 40150, the optical properties of the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be changed. When ions are implanted into the second electrochromic layer 40150, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be discolored. When ions are implanted into the second electrochromic layer 40150, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be colored or decolorized. When ions are implanted into the second electrochromic layer 40150, the light transmittance and/or light absorption rate of the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be changed. When ions are implanted into the second electrochromic layer 40150, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be reduced. When ions are implanted into the second electrochromic layer 40150, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be reduced and discolored. When ions are implanted into the second electrochromic layer 40150, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be reduced and colored. Alternatively, when ions are implanted into the second electrochromic layer 40150, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be reduced and decolorized.

The ions implanted into the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be released. When ions of the second electrochromic layer 40150 are released, the optical properties of the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be changed. When ions of the second electrochromic layer 40150 are released, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may change color. When ions of the second electrochromic layer 40150 are released, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be colored or decolorized. When ions of the second electrochromic layer 40150 are released, the light transmittance and/or light absorption rate of the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be changed. When ions of the second electrochromic layer 40150 are released, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be oxidized. When ions of the second electrochromic layer 40150 are released, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be oxidized and discolored. When ions of the second electrochromic layer 40150 are released, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be oxidized and colored. Alternatively, when ions of the second electrochromic layer 40150 are released, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be oxidized and decolorized.

When the ions of the first electrochromic layer 40130 are released, the ions may move to the second electrochromic layer 40150 . When the ions of the second electrochromic layer 40150 are released, the ions may move to the first electrochromic layer 40130 .

The chemical reactions occurring in the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be different reactions. A reverse chemical reaction may occur in the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150. When the first electrochromic layer 40130 is oxidized, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be reduced. When the first electrochromic layer 40130 is reduced, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be oxidized.

Therefore, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may function as a counter electrode for the second electrochromic layer 40150 .

The states of the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be changed due to the movement of ions.

State changes corresponding to each other may be induced in the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 . For example, when the first electrochromic layer 40130 is colored, the second electrochromic layer 40150 can also be colored, and when the first electrochromic layer 40130 is discolored, the second electrochromic layer 40150 can also be discolored. When the first electrochromic layer 40130 is oxidized and colored, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be reduced and colored, and when the first electrochromic layer 40130 is reduced and colored, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be reduced and colored Oxidized and colored.

Any one of the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may function as an electrochromic layer, and the other may function as an ion storage layer.

When the first electrochromic layer 40130 functions as an electrochromic layer, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may function as an ion storage layer.

A case where the first electrochromic layer 40130 is used as an electrochromic layer and the second electrochromic layer 40150 is used as an ion storage layer will be described below.

For example, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may contain tungsten atoms, and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may contain iridium atoms.

The first electrochromic layer 40130 may include tungsten oxide. The first electrochromic layer 40130 may include WO3.

The second electrochromic layer 40150 may include iridium oxide. The second electrochromic layer 40150 may include IrO2 and Ta2O5. In the second electrochromic layer 40150, IrO 2 and Ta2 O5 may exist in a mixed form.

In this case, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be reduced and colored, and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be oxidized and colored. Also, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be oxidized and decolorized, and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be reduced and decolorized.

That is, when ions move from the first electrochromic layer 40130 to the second electrochromic layer 40150, the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be decolorized, and when ions move from the second electrochromic layer 40150 When the electrochromic layer 40150 moves to the first electrochromic layer 40130, the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be colored.

Since the first electrochromic layer 40130 containing tungsten atoms is disposed near the substrate 40110, deterioration can be reduced, and thus discolored colors can be maintained. Since iridium atoms are more easily deformed when heat is applied thereto than tungsten atoms, by arranging the first electrochromic layer 40130 containing tungsten atoms in the vicinity of the substrate 40110 adjacent to the outside, the effect of preventing deterioration can be achieved .

When the first electrochromic layer 40130 functions as an ion storage layer, the second electrochromic layer 40150 may function as an electrochromic layer.

The case where the first electrochromic layer 40130 is used as an ion storage layer and the second electrochromic layer 40150 is used as an electrochromic layer will be described below.

For example, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may contain iridium atoms, and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may contain tungsten atoms.

The first electrochromic layer 40130 may include iridium oxide. The first electrochromic layer 40130 may include IrO2 and Ta2O5. In the first electrochromic layer 40130, IrO2 and Ta2O5 may exist in a mixed form.

The second electrochromic layer 40150 may include tungsten oxide. The second electrochromic layer 40150 may include WO3.

In this case, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be oxidized and colored, and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be reduced and colored. Also, the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be reduced and decolorized, and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be oxidized and decolorized.

That is, when ions move from the first electrochromic layer 40130 to the second electrochromic layer 40150, the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be colored, and when ions move from the second electrochromic layer 40150 When the electrochromic layer 40150 moves to the first electrochromic layer 40130, the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be decolorized.

Since the first electrochromic layer 40130 containing iridium atoms is disposed near the substrate 40110, the variation between the maximum reflectivity and the minimum reflectivity may increase. Light incident through the substrate 40110 is incident on the first electrochromic layer 40130 through the transparent electrode 40120 . Here, since the difference between the refractive indices of ITO and iridium is smaller than the difference between the refractive indices of ITO and tungsten when the transparent electrode 40120 is ITO, the amount of light that disappears on the surface can be reduced. That is, since the first electrochromic layer 40130 is formed of the material containing iridium atoms, the amount of light incident into the electrochromic element 40100 can be increased, and in this way, the difference between the maximum reflectance and the minimum reflectance Variation between can be increased. Since the range in which the amount of light can be adjusted increases as the change between the maximum reflectance and the minimum reflectance in the electrochromic element 40100 increases, by forming the first electrochromic layer 40130 using a material containing iridium atoms, it is possible to achieve an expansion The effect of the range in which the electrochromic element 40130 can be controlled.

Also, since the iridium atoms are relatively stable in the photocatalytic reaction, even when the first electrochromic layer 40130 including the iridium atoms is irradiated with light, changes in the electrical characteristics of the first electrochromic layer 40130 are small. Therefore, the effect of prolonging the service life of the product can be achieved.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a cross section of the electrochromic element according to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 90 , the electrochromic element 40100 according to the first embodiment includes a substrate 40110 , a transparent electrode 40120 , a first electrochromic layer 40130 , an ion transport layer 40140 , a second electrochromic layer 40150 and a reflection layer 40160 .

Contact holes 40180 may be formed in the electrochromic element 40100 . The contact hole 40180 may be a channel for electrically connecting the driving circuit 40170 and the transparent electrode 40120.

A contact hole 40180 may be formed through the first electrochromic layer 40130 , the ion transport layer 40140 , the second electrochromic layer 40150 and the reflective layer 40160 . The contact hole 40180 may expose a portion of the transparent electrode 40120. Due to the contact holes 40180, portions of the first electrochromic layer 40130, the ion transport layer 40140, the second electrochromic layer 40150, and the reflective layer 40160 may be removed.

The contact holes 40180 may be formed by laser or etching. The region removed due to the contact hole 40180 may be formed using an inclined surface having an angle. An acute angle may be formed between the contact hole 40180 and the boundary surface of each layer.

A partial area in which the first electrochromic layer 40130, the ion transport layer 40140, the second electrochromic layer 40150, and the reflective layer 40160 are removed through the contact hole 40180 may be defined as a removal area. The removal area may gradually become larger from the first electrochromic layer 40130 toward the reflective layer 40160 . For example, the removal area of the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be smaller than the removal area of the ion transport layer 40140, the removal area of the ion transport layer 40140 may be smaller than the removal area of the second electrochromic layer 40150, and the second electrochromic layer 40150 The removal area of the reflective layer 40160 may be smaller than that of the reflective layer 40160 .

The width of the removed area may gradually increase from the first electrochromic layer 40130 toward the reflective layer 40160 . For example, the width of the removed area of the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be smaller than the width of the removed area of the ion transport layer 40140, the width of the removed area of the ion transport layer 40140 may be smaller than the width of the removed area of the second electrochromic layer 40150, And the width of the removed area of the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be smaller than the width of the removed area of the reflective layer 40160 .

The removed area of the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be defined as a first removed area A1, and the removed area of the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be defined as a second removed area B1. The first removal area A1 may be smaller than the second removal area B1. In the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150, the removed area of the second electrochromic layer 40150 adjacent to the driving circuit 40170 may be larger than that of the first electrochromic layer 40130.

Cut portions 40190 may be formed in the electrochromic element 40100. Since the electrochromic elements 40100 are stacked on a single substrate and then cut into a plurality of electrochromic elements through a dicing process, each electrochromic element 40100 may include a cut portion 40190 .

Parts of the substrate 40110 , the transparent electrode 40120 , the first electrochromic layer 40130 , the ion transport layer 40140 , the second electrochromic layer 40150 and the reflective layer 40160 may be removed by cutting the part 40190 .

The cut portion 40190 may be formed by laser or etching. The region removed due to the cut portion 40190 may be formed using an inclined surface having an angle. An acute angle may be formed between the cut portion 40190 and the boundary surface of each layer. The cutting portion 40190 may be formed based on the cutting line 1.

When the cutting portion 40190 is formed by a laser, even when cutting is performed based on the cutting line 1, an area removed due to the cutting portion 40190 can be formed with an inclined surface having an angle.

A partial area in which the substrate 40110, the transparent electrode 40120, the first electrochromic layer 40130, the ion transport layer 40140, the second electrochromic layer 40150, and the reflective layer 40160 are removed due to the cutting part 40190 may be defined as a cutting area. The cutting area may gradually become larger from the substrate 40110 toward the reflective layer 40160 . For example, the cut area of the substrate 40110 may be smaller than the cut area of the transparent electrode 40120, the cut area of the transparent electrode 40120 may be smaller than the cut area of the first electrochromic layer 40130, and the cut area of the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be smaller than the ion transport layer The cut area of 40140, the cut area of the ion transport layer 40140 may be smaller than the cut area of the second electrochromic layer 40150, and the cut area of the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be smaller than the removed area of the reflective layer 40160.

The width of the cut area may gradually increase from the substrate 40110 toward the reflective layer 40160 . For example, the width of the cut area of the reflective layer 40160 may be greater than the width of the cut area of the second electrochromic layer 40150, the width of the cut area of the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be greater than the width of the cut area of the ion transport layer 40140, the ion The width of the cut area of the transport layer 40140 may be greater than the width of the cut area of the first electrochromic layer 40130, the width of the cut area of the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be greater than the width of the cut area of the transparent electrode 40120, and the width of the cut area of the transparent electrode 40120 The width of the cutting region of the substrate 40110 may be greater than the width of the cutting region of the substrate 40110 .

The cut area of the first electrochromic layer 40130 may be defined as a first cut area A3, and the cut area of the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be defined as a second cut area B3. The first cutting area A3 may be smaller than the second cutting area B3. In the first electrochromic layer 40130 and the second electrochromic layer 40150, the cutting area of the second electrochromic layer 40150 adjacent to the driving circuit 40170 may be larger than the cutting area of the first electrochromic layer 40130.

The first electrochromic layer 40130, the ion transport layer 40140, the second electrochromic layer 40150, and the reflective layer 40160 may further include residual regions. The remaining area may be the area between the contact hole 40180 and the cut portion 40190 . The first electrochromic layer 40130 may include a first residual area A2. The second electrochromic layer 40150 may include a second residual region B2.

The second residual area B2 of the second electrochromic layer 40150 adjacent to the driving circuit 40170 may be smaller than the first residual area A2 of the first electrochromic layer 40130 . The area where material is removed in the second electrochromic layer 40150 adjacent to the driving circuit 40170 may be larger than the area where material is removed in the first electrochromic layer 40140 spaced apart from the driving circuit 40170 . The sum of the second removal area B1 and the second cutting area B3 of the second electrochromic layer 40150 may be greater than the sum of the first removal area A1 and the first cutting area A3 of the first electrochromic layer 150 .

91 is a view showing an electrochromic device according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 92 is a cross-sectional view of the electrochromic element according to the second embodiment.

The electrochromic device according to the second embodiment is the same as the electrochromic device according to the first embodiment, except that the reflective layer is replaced with a transparent electrode. Therefore, in describing the second embodiment, the same reference numerals will be assigned to the configurations common to the first embodiment, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

91 and 92, the electrochromic element 40200 according to the second embodiment may include a substrate 40210, a first transparent electrode 40220, a first electrochromic layer 40230, an ion transport layer 40240, a second electrochromic layer 40250, and a first electrochromic layer 40230. Two transparent electrodes 40260.

Electrochromic element 40200 may be a window. When the electrochromic element 40200 is a window, the electrochromic element 40200 can receive a driving voltage, and the transmittance of the electrochromic element 40200 can be changed.

The first transparent electrode 40220 may be formed on the substrate 40210. The first transparent electrode 40220 and the second transparent electrode 40260 may be formed to face each other. The first electrochromic layer 4023 , the ion transport layer 40240 and the second electrochromic layer 40250 may be arranged between the first transparent electrode 40220 and the second transparent electrode 40260 .

Contact holes 40280 may be formed in the electrochromic element 40200 . The contact hole 40280 may be a channel for electrically connecting the first transparent electrode 40220 to an external driving circuit.

The contact holes 40280 may be formed by laser or etching. The region removed due to the contact hole 40280 may be formed with an inclined surface having an angle. An acute angle may be formed between the contact hole 40280 and the boundary surface of each layer.

The removed area of the first electrochromic layer 40230 may be defined as a first removed area A1, and the removed area of the second electrochromic layer 40250 may be defined as a second removed area B1. The first removal area A1 may be smaller than the second removal area B1. In the first electrochromic layer 40230 and the second electrochromic layer 40250, a removed area of the first electrochromic layer 40230 adjacent to the substrate 40210 may be smaller than a removed area of the second electrochromic layer 40250.

Cut portions 40290 may be formed in the electrochromic element 40200. Portions of the substrate 40210 , the first transparent electrode 40220 , the first electrochromic layer 40230 , the ion transport layer 40240 , the second electrochromic layer 40250 , and the second transparent electrode 40260 may be removed by cutting the portion 40290 .

The cut portion 40290 may be formed by laser or etching. The region removed due to the cutting portion 40290 may be formed using an angled inclined surface. An acute angle may be formed between the cut portion 40290 and the boundary surface of each layer. The cutting portion 40290 may be formed based on the cutting line 1.

The cut area of the first electrochromic layer 40230 may be defined as a first cut area A3, and the cut area of the second electrochromic layer 40250 may be defined as a second cut area B3. The first cutting area A3 may be smaller than the second cutting area B3. In the first electrochromic layer 40230 and the second electrochromic layer 40250, a cut area of the first electrochromic layer 40230 adjacent to the substrate 40210 may be smaller than a cut area of the second electrochromic layer 40250.

The first electrochromic layer 40230 and the second electrochromic layer 40250 may be formed of different materials. The electrochromic element 40200 may have different properties depending on the materials constituting the first electrochromic layer 40230 and the second electrochromic layer 40250.

93 is a graph showing transmittances in a discolored state of the electrochromic element according to the second embodiment and the electrochromic element of the third embodiment, and FIG. 94 is a graph showing the electrochromic element according to the second embodiment Graph of the transmittance in the colored state of the element and the electrochromic element according to the third embodiment.

The second and third embodiments show electrochromic elements having the structure of FIG. 91 , and in the second and third embodiments, the elements included in the first electrochromic layer and the second electrochromic layer Materials are different.

The second embodiment will be described below.

In the second embodiment, the first electrochromic layer 40230 of the electrochromic element 40200 may function as an electrochromic layer, and the second electrochromic layer 40250 thereof may function as an ion storage layer.

The first electrochromic layer 40230 may include tungsten atoms, and the second electrochromic layer 40250 may include iridium atoms.

The first electrochromic layer 40230 may include tungsten oxide. The first electrochromic layer may contain WO3.

The second electrochromic layer 40250 may include iridium oxide. The second electrochromic layer 40250 may contain IrO2 and Ta2O5. In the second electrochromic layer 40250, IrO2 and Ta2O5 may exist in a mixed form.

In this case, the first electrochromic layer 40230 may be reduced and colored, and the second electrochromic layer 40250 may be oxidized and colored. Also, the first electrochromic layer 40230 may be oxidized and decolorized, and the second electrochromic layer 40250 may be reduced and decolorized.

That is, when ions move from the first electrochromic layer 40230 to the second electrochromic layer 40250, the first electrochromic layer 40230 and the second electrochromic layer 40250 may be decolorized, and when ions move from the second electrochromic layer 40250 When the electrochromic layer 40250 moves to the first electrochromic layer 40230, the first electrochromic layer 40230 and the second electrochromic layer 40250 may be colored.

The electrochromic element 40200 according to the second embodiment may have the spectral transmittance shown in FIG. 93 when decolorized, and the spectral transmittance shown in FIG. 94 when colored.

Specifically, the electrochromic element 40200 may have an average transmittance of 57.392% when decolorized, and may have an average transmittance of 9.284% when colored with respect to transmittance in the visible light region having wavelengths in the range of 400 nm to 700 μm .

Since the first electrochromic layer 40230 containing tungsten atoms is disposed near the substrate 40210, the change between the transmittance at the time of decolorization and the transmittance at the time of coloring is increased. As a result, there is an effect that the range of transmittance that can be controlled by the electrochromic element 40200 is widened.

Also, since the first electrochromic layer 40230 including tungsten atoms is disposed near the substrate 40210, deterioration can be reduced, and thus discolored colors can be maintained. Since iridium atoms are more easily deformed when heat is applied thereto than tungsten atoms, by arranging the first electrochromic layer 40130 containing tungsten atoms in the vicinity of the substrate 40110 adjacent to the outside, the effect of preventing deterioration can be achieved .

The third embodiment will be described below.

In the third embodiment, the first electrochromic layer 40230 of the electrochromic element 40200 may function as an ion storage layer, and the second electrochromic layer 40250 thereof may function as an electrochromic layer.

The first electrochromic layer 40230 may include iridium atoms, and the second electrochromic layer 40250 may include tungsten atoms.

The first electrochromic layer 40230 may include iridium oxide. The first electrochromic layer 40230 may include IrO2 and Ta2O5. In the first electrochromic layer 40230, IrO2 and Ta2O5 may exist in a mixed form.

The second electrochromic layer 40250 may include tungsten oxide. The second electrochromic layer 40250 may include WO3.

In this case, the second electrochromic layer 40230 may be oxidized and colored, and the second electrochromic layer 40250 may be reduced and colored. Also, the first electrochromic layer 40230 may be reduced and decolorized, and the second electrochromic layer 40250 may be oxidized and decolorized.

That is, when ions move from the first electrochromic layer 40230 to the second electrochromic layer 40250, the first electrochromic layer 40230 and the second electrochromic layer 40250 may be colored, and when ions move from the second electrochromic layer 40250 When the electrochromic layer 40250 moves to the first electrochromic layer 40230, the first electrochromic layer 40230 and the second electrochromic layer 40250 may be decolorized.

The electrochromic element 40200 according to the third embodiment may have the spectral transmittance shown in FIG. 93 when decolorized, and the spectral transmittance shown in FIG. 94 when colored.

Specifically, the electrochromic element 40200 may have an average transmittance of 55.543% when decolorized, and may have an average transmittance of 10.882% when colored .

Also, in the case of the electrochromic element according to the third embodiment, the change in transmittance according to wavelength is small in the visible light region. Since the change in transmittance according to wavelength is small in the electrochromic element according to the third embodiment, an effect of preventing the color of the electrochromic element from being regarded as another color under certain conditions can be achieved.

Also, since the iridium atoms are relatively stable in the photocatalytic reaction, even when the first electrochromic layer 40130 containing the iridium atoms adjacent to the outside is irradiated with light, the electrical characteristics of the first electrochromic layer 40130 are not changed. very small. Therefore, the effect of prolonging the service life of the product can be achieved.

Figure 95 is a diagram showing an electrochromic element having a curvature.

The electrochromic element according to the second embodiment and the electrochromic element according to the third embodiment can be manufactured in a form having a curvature.

The electrochromic element can be manufactured in a curved form, in a bendable form, or in a flexible form.

When the electrochromic element is manufactured in a curved form, the electrochromic element can be applied to a vehicle window or a vehicle sunroof.

Each layer of electrochromic element 40200 may have curvature. The layers of electrochromic element 40200 may have different radii of curvature. Each layer of the electrochromic element 40200 may have a gradually larger radius of curvature toward the substrate 40210 and a gradually smaller radius of curvature toward the second transparent electrode 40260 . The center of curvature of the electrochromic element 40200 may be toward the second transparent electrode 40260 .

The first transparent electrode 40220 may have a radius of curvature smaller than that of the substrate 40210 . The first electrochromic layer 40230 may have a radius of curvature smaller than that of the first transparent electrode 40220 . The ion transport layer 40240 may have a radius of curvature smaller than that of the first electrochromic layer 40230 . The second electrochromic layer 40250 may have a radius of curvature smaller than that of the ion transport layer 40240 . The second transparent electrode 40260 may have a radius of curvature smaller than that of the second electrochromic layer 40250 .

The first electrochromic layer 40230 may have a first radius of curvature r1. The first radius of curvature r1 may be defined as the distance between the center of curvature of the first electrochromic layer 40230 and the midpoint N1 of the first electrochromic layer 40230 .

The second electrochromic layer 40230 may have a second radius of curvature r2. The second radius of curvature r2 may be defined as the distance between the center of curvature of the second electrochromic layer 40250 and the midpoint N2 of the second electrochromic layer 40250 .

The first radius of curvature r1 may be greater than the second radius of curvature r2.

In the case of the second embodiment, the radius of curvature of the first electrochromic layer 40230 containing tungsten atoms may be larger than the radius of curvature of the second electrochromic layer 40250 containing iridium atoms. Since the flexibility of iridium oxide containing iridium atoms is higher than that of tungsten oxide containing tungsten atoms, there is an effect of improving the structural stability of the electrochromic element 40200 according to the second embodiment.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an electrochromic device applied to glass for buildings.

The electrochromic element according to the second embodiment and the electrochromic element according to the third embodiment can be applied to glass for buildings.

Electrochromic device 40201 may include electrochromic element 40200 , outer glass 40300 and fluid chamber 40310 .

The electrochromic element 40200 may include a substrate 40210 , a first transparent electrode 40220 , a first electrochromic layer 40230 , an ion transport layer 40240 , a second electrochromic layer 40250 and a second transparent electrode 40260 .

The outer glass 40300 may be glass in contact with the outside air.

The fluid chamber 40310 may be disposed between the outer glass 40300 and the electrochromic element 40200 . The fluid chamber 40310 may be disposed between the second transparent electrode 40260 and the outer glass 40300 .

Fluid can be injected into fluid chamber 40310. Since the fluid is injected into the fluid member 40310, the heat exchanged between the outside and the electrochromic element 40200 can be reduced. As a result, the insulating effect can be improved.

Compared with the first electrochromic layer 40230, the second electrochromic layer 40250 may be closer to the outside. Alternatively, the second electrochromic layer 40250 may be closer to the fluid than the first electrochromic layer 40230.

In the case of the second embodiment, the first electrochromic layer 40230 may contain tungsten atoms, and the second electrochromic layer 40250 may contain iridium atoms. The second electrochromic layer 40250 containing iridium atoms may be arranged in a region closer to the fluid than the first electrochromic layer 40230 containing tungsten atoms.

In the case of the third embodiment, the first electrochromic layer 40230 may contain iridium atoms, and the second electrochromic layer 40250 may contain tungsten atoms. The second electrochromic layer 40250 containing tungsten atoms may be arranged in a region closer to the fluid than the first electrochromic layer 40230 containing iridium atoms.

Although the configuration and features of the present application have been described above based on the embodiment, the embodiment is not limited thereto. It should be clearly understood by those skilled in the art that the present application may be changed or modified in various ways within the spirit and scope of the embodiments. Therefore, it should be noted that such changes or modifications fall within the scope of the appended claims.

Claims (20)

1. a kind of electrochromic device, characterized by comprising:

Electric driven color-changing part, the electric driven color-changing part include first electrode, second electrode, are arranged in the first electrode and institute The ion stating the electrochromic layer between second electrode and being arranged between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode is deposited Reservoir；With

Control unit, it is described to be configured as making in the electric driven color-changing part by applying electric power to the electric driven color-changing part At least one ion it is mobile, to control the state of the electric driven color-changing part, to change into the state with first The first state of transmissivity, the second state with the second transmissivity, the third state with third transmissivity or the 4th are thoroughly At least one of the 4th state of rate is penetrated,

Wherein, second transmissivity has the value bigger than the value of first transmissivity, and the third transmissivity has than institute The big value of the value of the second transmissivity is stated, and the 4th transmissivity has the value bigger than the value of the third transmissivity,

In the state that electric driven color-changing part has the first state, first voltage is applied to the electric driven color-changing part When, the electric driven color-changing part becomes second state, and

In the state that the electric driven color-changing part has four state, the first voltage is applied to described electroluminescent When photochromic elements, the electric driven color-changing part becomes the third state.

2. electrochromic device as described in claim 1, which is characterized in that the electrochromic layer and the ion storage Changed colour by the movement of the ion.

3. electrochromic device as described in claim 1, which is characterized in that the electrochromic layer and the ion storage There is binding force with the ion, and

Between the binding force and the ion storage and the ion between the electrochromic layer and the ion The binding force is different from each other.

4. the as claimed in claim 3 electrochromic device, which is characterized in that for discharge the electrochromic layer and it is described from The first threshold voltage of combination between son and for discharging the combination between the ion storage and the ion second Threshold voltage is different from each other.

5. the electrochromic device as claimed in claim 3, which is characterized in that the electrochromic layer has built-in potential, and And

Wherein, the built-in potential is proportional to the quantity of the ion being located in the electrochromic layer.

6. the electrochromic device as claimed in claim 5, which is characterized in that described control unit applies than the built-in potential The high voltage with the sum of the first threshold voltage, with the movement ion.

7. the electrochromic device as claimed in claim 5, which is characterized in that described control unit applies than the built-in potential The small voltage of difference between the first threshold voltage, with the movement ion.

8. the electrochromic device as claimed in claim 1, which is characterized in that described in including in the electrochromic layer The quantity of ion determines the first state, second state, the third state or the 4th state.

9. electrochromic device as described in claim 1, which is characterized in that according to the ion for including in the electrochromic layer The first state, second state, the third shape are determined with the ratio of the ion for including in the ion storage State or the 4th state.

10. electrochromic device as claimed in claim 3, which is characterized in that between the electrochromic layer and the ion The binding force and the ion storage and the ion between the binding force be physical bond power or chemical bonding Power.

11. such as electrochromic device according to claim 10, which is characterized in that due to constitute the electrochromic layer and The different physical structures of the material of the ion storage, so the object between the electrochromic layer and the ion The physical bond power managed between binding force and the ion storage and the ion is different from each other.

12. the electrochromic device as claimed in claim 1, which is characterized in that the ion is hydrogen ion or lithium ion.

13. a kind of electrochromic device, characterized by comprising:

Electric driven color-changing part, the electric driven color-changing part include first electrode, second electrode, are arranged in the first electrode and institute The ion stating the electrochromic layer between second electrode and being arranged between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode is deposited Reservoir；With

Control unit, described control unit are configured as making the electroluminescent change by applying electric power to the electric driven color-changing part At least one ion in color component is mobile, to control the state of the electric driven color-changing part, changes into the first transmissivity At least one of first state, the second state with the second transmissivity or the third state with third transmissivity,

Wherein, second transmissivity has the value bigger than the value of first transmissivity, and the third transmissivity has than institute The big value of the value of the second transmissivity is stated,

Wherein, described control unit by under the state that the electric driven color-changing part has the first state to described Electric driven color-changing part applies first voltage, and the state of the electric driven color-changing part is changed into second state,

Described control unit by under the state that the electric driven color-changing part has the third state to described electroluminescent Photochromic elements apply second voltage, and the state of the electric driven color-changing part is changed into second state, and

The first voltage and the second voltage are different from each other.

14. the electrochromic device as claimed in claim 1, which is characterized in that the second voltage is higher than the first voltage.

15. electrochromic device as claimed in claim 13, which is characterized in that described control unit is configured as based on described Electric driven color-changing part is in the first state or the third state, to control the first voltage or the second voltage Selectivity apply.

16. electrochromic device as claimed in claim 15, which is characterized in that described control unit is based on the electrochromism Equipment is in the first state or the third state, to determine for the electric driven color-changing part to be changed into described The processing of two-state is coloring treatment or decolorization, and is configured as controlling the first voltage or the second voltage Selectivity apply.

17. electrochromic device as claimed in claim 16, which is characterized in that described control unit is configured as passing through application The original state is determined to the voltage of original state.

18. electrochromic device as claimed in claim 16, which is characterized in that further include:

Storage unit, the storage unit are configured as being stored in each driving in the coloring treatment and the decolorization Voltage.

19. electrochromic device as claimed in claim 18, which is characterized in that the storage unit is configured to deposit Store up the driving of each target level in the driving voltage and the decolorization of each target level in the coloring treatment Voltage.

20. a kind of electrochromic device, characterized by comprising:

Electric driven color-changing part, the electric driven color-changing part include first electrode, second electrode, are arranged in the first electrode and institute The ion stating the electrochromic layer between second electrode and being arranged between the electrochromic layer and the second electrode is deposited Reservoir；With

Control unit, described control unit are configured as coming by least one ion in the movement electric driven color-changing part Apply electric power to the electric driven color-changing part, so that electric driven color-changing part coloring or decoloration,

Wherein, when applying second voltage to the electrochromic device in the decolored state, the electrochromism member Part coloring, by applying first voltage to the electrochromic device, the electrochromic device is in the decolored state, and And

Wherein, the tertiary voltage of the original state of the electrochromic device is kept to be present in the first voltage and described second Between voltage.